WO2024197835A1 - Enhancements for random access procedures - Google Patents
Enhancements for random access procedures Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2024197835A1 WO2024197835A1 PCT/CN2023/085550 CN2023085550W WO2024197835A1 WO 2024197835 A1 WO2024197835 A1 WO 2024197835A1 CN 2023085550 W CN2023085550 W CN 2023085550W WO 2024197835 A1 WO2024197835 A1 WO 2024197835A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- network entity
- downlink control
- random access
- message
- downlink
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W74/00—Wireless channel access
- H04W74/08—Non-scheduled access, e.g. ALOHA
- H04W74/0833—Random access procedures, e.g. with 4-step access
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
- H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
- H04L5/005—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver of common pilots, i.e. pilots destined for multiple users or terminals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
- H04L5/0053—Allocation of signalling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/0001—Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
- H04L5/0003—Two-dimensional division
- H04L5/0005—Time-frequency
- H04L5/0007—Time-frequency the frequencies being orthogonal, e.g. OFDM(A) or DMT
- H04L5/001—Time-frequency the frequencies being orthogonal, e.g. OFDM(A) or DMT the frequencies being arranged in component carriers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
- H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
Definitions
- the following relates to wireless communications, including mobility enhancements for random access (RA) procedures.
- RA random access
- Wireless communications systems are widely deployed to provide various types of communication content such as voice, video, packet data, messaging, broadcast, and so on. These systems may be capable of supporting communication with multiple users by sharing the available system resources (e.g., time, frequency, and power) .
- Examples of such multiple-access systems include fourth generation (4G) systems such as Long Term Evolution (LTE) systems, LTE-Advanced (LTE-A) systems, or LTE-A Pro systems, and fifth generation (5G) systems which may be referred to as New Radio (NR) systems.
- 4G systems such as Long Term Evolution (LTE) systems, LTE-Advanced (LTE-A) systems, or LTE-A Pro systems
- 5G systems which may be referred to as New Radio (NR) systems.
- a wireless multiple-access communications system may include one or more base stations, each supporting wireless communication for communication devices, which may be known as user equipment (UE) .
- UE user equipment
- the described techniques relate to improved methods, systems, devices, and apparatuses that support mobility enhancements for random access (RA) procedures.
- the techniques described herein may enable enhancements to physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) -ordered RA procedures to improve reliability and resource utilization.
- a user equipment (UE) may transmit, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UE assistance information (UAI) , or a first request for a PDCCH-ordered RA procedure, wherein the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information (DCI) message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit an RA message to a second network entity.
- DCI downlink control information
- the first network entity may transmit, to the second network entity, a second request for the second network entity to perform the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure with the UE based on receiving the measurement report, the UAI, or the first request, from the UE.
- the second network entity may transmit, responsive to the second request, an acknowledgment message indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure.
- the UE may receive, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the first request, a first set of control messages indicating a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure.
- the UE may receive, from the first network entity, the DCI message and may participate in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the DCI message, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
- a method for wireless communications at a user equipment may include transmitting, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UAI, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity, receiving, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UAI, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, receiving, from the first network entity, the DCI message, and participating in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the DCI message, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
- the apparatus may include a processor, memory coupled with the processor, and instructions stored in the memory.
- the instructions may be executable by the processor to cause the apparatus to transmit, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UAI, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity, receive, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UAI, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, receive, from the first network entity, the DCI message, and participate in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the DCI message, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set
- the apparatus may include means for transmitting, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UAI, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity, means for receiving, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UAI, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, means for receiving, from the first network entity, the DCI message, and means for participating in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the DCI message, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
- a non-transitory computer-readable medium storing code for wireless communications at a UE is described.
- the code may include instructions executable by a processor to transmit, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UAI, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity, receive, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UAI, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, receive, from the first network entity, the DCI message, and participate in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the DCI message, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
- Some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein may further include operations, features, means, or instructions for obtaining a TA associated with the second network entity based on performing a portion of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages, where the set of uplink resources, the set of downlink resources, or both, may be associated with the first network entity, the second network entity, or both.
- the set of uplink resources includes at least one uplink BWP associated with the second network entity and one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure and the set of downlink resources includes at least one downlink BWP associated with the at least one uplink BWP and one or more downlink reference signals associated with the one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the first set of control messages may be further indicative of parameters associated with one or more uplink channels associated with the at least one uplink BWP, one or more reference numerologies, one or more preamble formats, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one uplink BWP, one or more repetition patterns associated with an initial message of the RA communications, one or more frequency hopping patterns associated with the initial message, one or more beam switch patterns associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of repetitions of the initial message, a threshold quantity of frequency hops associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of beam switches associated with the initial message, a set of uplink data resource or uplink control resources associated with the second network entity for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity, one or more downlink channels associated with the at least one downlink BWP, one or more control resource sets, one or more search space sets, one or more reference signals,
- participating in the RA communications may include operations, features, means, or instructions for receiving a downlink reference signal associated with an initial message of the RA communications and a RAR of the RA communications, where the RAR may be QCL’ed with the downlink reference signal or one or more reference signals indicated via the DCI message.
- participating in the RA communications may include operations, features, means, or instructions for transmitting, to the second network entity and responsive to the RAR, a feedback message of the RA communications in accordance with one or more spatial filters, where at least one of the one or more spatial filters may be associated with a beam switch pattern of the initial message of the RA communications.
- participating in the RA communications may include operations, features, means, or instructions for receiving a TA command or a RAR of the RA communications associated with the second network entity, where a downlink control channel used to receive the TA command or a downlink control channel used to receive the RAR may be QCL’ed with a downlink control channel used to receive the DCI message.
- participating in the RA communications may include operations, features, means, or instructions for transmitting, to the first network entity and responsive to the RAR, a feedback message of the RA communications according to a spatial filter, where the spatial filter may be associated with a TCI state further associated with the downlink control channel used to receive the DCI message, the downlink control channel used to receive the TA command, or the downlink control channel used to receive the RAR.
- the first set of control messages include one or more SI messages, one or more RRC messages, one or more MAC-CE messages, one or more second DCI messages, or any combination thereof.
- Some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein may further include operations, features, means, or instructions for receiving, from the second network entity, a second set of control messages that may be indicative of one or more parameters associated with the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the DCI message may be indicative of an identifier associated with the second network entity, an identifier associated with an uplink BWP further associated with the RA communications, or both.
- the first set of control messages may be indicative of one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the RA communications and the DCI message may be indicative of a coverage enhancement scheme from the one or more coverage enhancement schemes selected for an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the one or more coverage enhancement schemes indicated by the first set of control messages may be indicative of a first coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of an initial message of the RA communications in a time domain, a second coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of the initial message in a frequency domain, a third coverage enhancement scheme associated with frequency hopping of the initial message, a fourth coverage enhancement scheme associated with switching a transmission beam associated with the initial message, or any combination thereof.
- the first set of control messages may be further indicative of a quantity of repetitions associated with the first coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of repetitions associated with the second coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of frequency hops associated with the third coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of beam switches associated with the fourth coverage enhancement scheme, an index associated with a pattern further associated with a coverage enhancement scheme of the one or more coverage enhancement schemes, oy any combination thereof.
- the DCI message may be indicative of an activation of a set of uplink data resources or uplink control resources for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity or may be indicative of whether the UE may retransmit an initial message of the RA communications prior to expiration of a timer, a control message of the first set of control messages includes an indication of the timer, and the UE initiates the timer based on receiving a last symbol of the DCI message.
- participating in the RA communications may include operations, features, means, or instructions for transmitting an initial message of the RA communications based on the first set of control messages, where a first duration between reception of a last symbol of the DCI message and transmission of a first symbol of the initial message satisfies one or more thresholds.
- participating in the RA communications may include operations, features, means, or instructions for transmitting a retransmission of the initial message of the RA communications based on transmitting the initial message, where a second duration between reception of the last symbol of the DCI message and transmission of a first symbol of the retransmission satisfies the one or more thresholds.
- the first duration exceeds a first threshold of the one or more thresholds and fails to exceed a second threshold of the one or more thresholds.
- the first threshold may be based on a capability of the UE, a coverage enhancement scheme indicated to the UE, a duration associated with switching a BWP, a carrier frequency, a frequency range and a SCI between the first network entity and the second network entity, a processing delay, a cell re-selection delay, a transmit chain switching mode of the UE, or any combination thereof.
- the second threshold may be based on a validity period associated with the DCI message.
- a method for wireless communications at a first network entity may include receiving, from a UE, a measurement report, UAI, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity, transmitting, responsive to the measurement report, the UAI, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, and transmitting the DCI message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
- the apparatus may include a processor, memory coupled with the processor, and instructions stored in the memory.
- the instructions may be executable by the processor to cause the apparatus to receive, from a UE, a measurement report, UAI, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity, transmit, responsive to the measurement report, the UAI, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, and transmit the DCI message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
- the apparatus may include means for receiving, from a UE, a measurement report, UAI, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity, means for transmitting, responsive to the measurement report, the UAI, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, and means for transmitting the DCI message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
- a non-transitory computer-readable medium storing code for wireless communications at a first network entity is described.
- the code may include instructions executable by a processor to receive, from a UE, a measurement report, UAI, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity, transmit, responsive to the measurement report, the UAI, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, and transmit the DCI message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
- Some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein may further include operations, features, means, or instructions for transmitting, to the second network entity, a second request for the second network entity to perform the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure with the UE based on receiving the measurement report, the UAI, or the first request from the UE and receiving, responsive to the second request, an acknowledgment message indicative of the set of uplink resources and the set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the set of uplink resources includes at least one uplink BWP associated with the second network entity and one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure and the set of downlink resources includes at least one downlink BWP associated with the at least one uplink BWP and one or more downlink reference signals associated with the one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the first set of control messages may be further indicative of parameters associated with one or more uplink channels associated with the at least one uplink BWP, one or more reference numerologies, one or more preamble formats, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one uplink BWP, one or more repetition patterns associated with an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, one or more frequency hopping patterns associated with the initial message, one or more beam switch patterns associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of repetitions of the initial message, a threshold quantity of frequency hops associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of beam switches associated with the initial message, a set of uplink data resource or uplink control resources associated with the second network entity for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity, one or more downlink channels associated with the at least one downlink BWP, one or more control resource sets, one or more search space
- the at least one downlink BWP may be associated with the first network entity and the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium may include further operations, features, means, or instructions for transmitting a TA command or a RAR of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure associated with the second network entity, where a downlink control channel used to receive the TA command or a downlink control channel used to receive the RAR may be QCL’ed with a downlink control channel used to receive the DCI message.
- Some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein may further include operations, features, means, or instructions for receiving, responsive to the RAR, a feedback message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure according to a spatial filter, where the spatial filter may be associated with a TCI state further associated with the downlink control channel used to receive the DCI message, the downlink control channel used to receive the TA command, or the downlink control channel used to receive the RAR.
- the first set of control messages include one or more SI messages, one or more RRC messages, one or more MAC-CE messages, one or more second DCI messages, or any combination thereof.
- the DCI message may be indicative of an identifier associated with the second network entity, an identifier associated with an uplink BWP further associated with the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, or both.
- the first set of control messages may be indicative of one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure and the DCI message may be indicative of a coverage enhancement scheme from the one or more coverage enhancement schemes selected for an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the one or more coverage enhancement schemes indicated by the first set of control messages may be indicative of a first coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure in a time domain, a second coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of the initial message in a frequency domain, a third coverage enhancement scheme associated with frequency hopping of the initial message, a fourth coverage enhancement scheme associated with switching a transmission beam associated with the initial message, or any combination thereof.
- the first set of control messages may be further indicative of a quantity of repetitions associated with the first coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of repetitions associated with the second coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of frequency hops associated with the third coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of beam switches associated with the fourth coverage enhancement scheme, an index associated with a pattern further associated with a coverage enhancement scheme of the one or more coverage enhancement schemes, oy any combination thereof.
- the DCI message may be indicative of an activation of a set of uplink data resources or uplink control resources for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity or may be indicative of whether the UE may retransmit an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure prior to expiration of a timer, a control message of the first set of control messages includes an indication of the timer, and initiation of the timer may be based on the UE receiving a last symbol of the DCI message.
- Some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein may further include operations, features, means, or instructions for receiving an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure based on the first set of control messages, where a first duration between reception of a last symbol of the DCI message and transmission of a first symbol of the initial message satisfies one or more thresholds.
- the first duration exceeds a first threshold of the one or more thresholds and fails to exceed a second threshold of the one or more thresholds.
- the first threshold may be based on a capability of the UE, a coverage enhancement scheme indicated to the UE, a duration associated with switching a BWP, a carrier frequency, a frequency range and a SCI between the first network entity and the second network entity, a processing delay, a cell re-selection delay, a transmit chain switching mode of the UE, or any combination thereof.
- the second threshold may be based on a validity period associated with the DCI message.
- FIG. 1 shows an example of a wireless communications system that supports mobility enhancements for random access (RA) procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- RA random access
- FIG. 2 shows an example of a wireless communications system that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 3 shows an example of a timing diagram that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 4 shows an example of a process flow that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIGs. 5 and 6 show block diagrams of devices that support mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 7 shows a block diagram of a communications manager that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 8 shows a diagram of a system including a device that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIGs. 9 and 10 show block diagrams of devices that support mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 11 shows a block diagram of a communications manager that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 12 shows a diagram of a system including a device that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- FIGs. 13 through 16 show flowcharts illustrating methods that support mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- Some wireless communications systems may support Layer 1 (L1) or Layer 2 (L2) -triggered mobility (LTM) procedures.
- a user equipment (UE) communicating with a source cell, such as a first network entity, may switch communications to a target cell, such as a second network entity, in response to receiving a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) order from the first network entity. That is, the UE may receive, from the first network entity, a PDCCH order initiation a random access (RA) procedure with the second network entity.
- PDCCH physical downlink control channel
- the UE may transmit an initial message (e.g., msg1/msgA) of the RA procedure based on the PDCCH order and may receive, from the second network entity, a random access response (RAR) in response to the initial message.
- RAR random access response
- a first transmission of the PDCCH order may fail or the UE may not receive the RAR.
- the UE may reattempt the RA procedure with the second network entity or may select an additional network entity to attempt the RA procedure, which may increase the latency of mobility and reduce the efficiency of RA resource utilization. In other words, failure of an RA procedure may cause a resource bottleneck.
- a first enhancement may enable the first network entity, the second network entity, or both, to provide additional information to the UE prior to the PDCCH order to support early estimation of a timing advance (TA) , among other capabilities. That is, the UE may transmit, to the first network entity, a request for the UE to perform a PDCCH- ordered RA procedure and the first network entity, the second network entity, or both, may transmit, to the UE, the additional information including at least uplink resources and downlink resources associated with the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure.
- TA timing advance
- a second enhancement may enable the PDCCH order triggering the RA procedure to indicate one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the initial message transmission to the second network entity.
- the one or more coverage enhancement schemes may indicate that one or more of the following enhancements may be enabled: repetition of the initial message in the time domain, repetition of the initial message in the frequency domain, frequency hopping of the initial message, and transmission beam switching of the initial message.
- a third enhancement may define a timeline associated with transmission of the PDCCH order and the initial message to support efficient resource utilization. For example, a duration between a last symbol of the PDCCH order and a first symbol of the initial message and/or a first symbol of a retransmission of the initial message may be within a specified time range.
- the lower threshold of the time range may be based on a capability of the UE, a time associated with switching a bandwidth part (BWP) , a frequency, a frequency range, a subcarrier spacing (SCS) , a switching mode of the UE, or any combination thereof.
- the upper threshold may be based on a validity period of the resources indicated by the PDCCH order.
- aspects of the disclosure are initially described in the context of wireless communications systems. Aspects of the disclosures are then described in the context of a timing diagram and a process flow. Aspects of the disclosure are further illustrated by and described with reference to apparatus diagrams, system diagrams, and flowcharts that relate to mobility enhancements for RA procedures.
- FIG. 1 shows an example of a wireless communications system 100 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the wireless communications system 100 may include one or more network entities 105, one or more UEs 115, and a core network 130.
- the wireless communications system 100 may be a Long Term Evolution (LTE) network, an LTE-Advanced (LTE-A) network, an LTE-A Pro network, a New Radio (NR) network, or a network operating in accordance with other systems and radio technologies, including future systems and radio technologies not explicitly mentioned herein.
- LTE Long Term Evolution
- LTE-A LTE-Advanced
- LTE-A Pro LTE-A Pro
- NR New Radio
- the network entities 105 may be dispersed throughout a geographic area to form the wireless communications system 100 and may include devices in different forms or having different capabilities.
- a network entity 105 may be referred to as a network element, a mobility element, a radio access network (RAN) node, or network equipment, among other nomenclature.
- network entities 105 and UEs 115 may wirelessly communicate via one or more communication links 125 (e.g., a radio frequency (RF) access link) .
- a network entity 105 may support a coverage area 110 (e.g., a geographic coverage area) over which the UEs 115 and the network entity 105 may establish one or more communication links 125.
- the coverage area 110 may be an example of a geographic area over which a network entity 105 and a UE 115 may support the communication of signals according to one or more radio access technologies (RATs) .
- RATs radio access technologies
- the UEs 115 may be dispersed throughout a coverage area 110 of the wireless communications system 100, and each UE 115 may be stationary, or mobile, or both at different times.
- the UEs 115 may be devices in different forms or having different capabilities. Some example UEs 115 are illustrated in FIG. 1.
- the UEs 115 described herein may be capable of supporting communications with various types of devices, such as other UEs 115 or network entities 105, as shown in FIG. 1.
- a node of the wireless communications system 100 which may be referred to as a network node, or a wireless node, may be a network entity 105 (e.g., any network entity described herein) , a UE 115 (e.g., any UE described herein) , a network controller, an apparatus, a device, a computing system, one or more components, or another suitable processing entity configured to perform any of the techniques described herein.
- a node may be a UE 115.
- a node may be a network entity 105.
- a first node may be configured to communicate with a second node or a third node.
- the first node may be a UE 115
- the second node may be a network entity 105
- the third node may be a UE 115.
- the first node may be a UE 115
- the second node may be a network entity 105
- the third node may be a network entity 105.
- the first, second, and third nodes may be different relative to these examples.
- reference to a UE 115, network entity 105, apparatus, device, computing system, or the like may include disclosure of the UE 115, network entity 105, apparatus, device, computing system, or the like being a node.
- disclosure that a UE 115 is configured to receive information from a network entity 105 also discloses that a first node is configured to receive information from a second node.
- network entities 105 may communicate with the core network 130, or with one another, or both.
- network entities 105 may communicate with the core network 130 via one or more backhaul communication links 120 (e.g., in accordance with an S1, N2, N3, or other interface protocol) .
- network entities 105 may communicate with one another via a backhaul communication link 120 (e.g., in accordance with an X2, Xn, or other interface protocol) either directly (e.g., directly between network entities 105) or indirectly (e.g., via a core network 130) .
- network entities 105 may communicate with one another via a midhaul communication link 162 (e.g., in accordance with a midhaul interface protocol) or a fronthaul communication link 168 (e.g., in accordance with a fronthaul interface protocol) , or any combination thereof.
- the backhaul communication links 120, midhaul communication links 162, or fronthaul communication links 168 may be or include one or more wired links (e.g., an electrical link, an optical fiber link) , one or more wireless links (e.g., a radio link, a wireless optical link) , among other examples or various combinations thereof.
- a UE 115 may communicate with the core network 130 via a communication link 155.
- One or more of the network entities 105 described herein may include or may be referred to as a base station 140 (e.g., a base transceiver station, a radio base station, an NR base station, an access point, a radio transceiver, a NodeB, an eNodeB (eNB) , a next-generation NodeB or a giga-NodeB (either of which may be referred to as a gNB) , a 5G NB, a next-generation eNB (ng-eNB) , a Home NodeB, a Home eNodeB, or other suitable terminology) .
- a base station 140 e.g., a base transceiver station, a radio base station, an NR base station, an access point, a radio transceiver, a NodeB, an eNodeB (eNB) , a next-generation NodeB or a giga-NodeB (either of which may be
- a network entity 105 may be implemented in an aggregated (e.g., monolithic, standalone) base station architecture, which may be configured to utilize a protocol stack that is physically or logically integrated within a single network entity 105 (e.g., a single RAN node, such as a base station 140) .
- a network entity 105 may be implemented in a disaggregated architecture (e.g., a disaggregated base station architecture, a disaggregated RAN architecture) , which may be configured to utilize a protocol stack that is physically or logically distributed among two or more network entities 105, such as an integrated access backhaul (IAB) network, an open RAN (O-RAN) (e.g., a network configuration sponsored by the O-RAN Alliance) , or a virtualized RAN (vRAN) (e.g., a cloud RAN (C-RAN) ) .
- IAB integrated access backhaul
- O-RAN open RAN
- vRAN virtualized RAN
- C-RAN cloud RAN
- a network entity 105 may include one or more of a central unit (CU) 160, a distributed unit (DU) 165, a radio unit (RU) 170, a RAN Intelligent Controller (RIC) 175 (e.g., a Near-Real Time RIC (Near-RT RIC) , a Non-Real Time RIC (Non-RT RIC) ) , a Service Management and Orchestration (SMO) 180 system, or any combination thereof.
- An RU 170 may also be referred to as a radio head, a smart radio head, a remote radio head (RRH) , a remote radio unit (RRU) , or a transmission reception point (TRP) .
- One or more components of the network entities 105 in a disaggregated RAN architecture may be co-located, or one or more components of the network entities 105 may be located in distributed locations (e.g., separate physical locations) .
- one or more network entities 105 of a disaggregated RAN architecture may be implemented as virtual units (e.g., a virtual CU (VCU) , a virtual DU (VDU) , a virtual RU (VRU) ) .
- VCU virtual CU
- VDU virtual DU
- VRU virtual RU
- the split of functionality between a CU 160, a DU 165, and an RU 170 is flexible and may support different functionalities depending on which functions (e.g., network layer functions, protocol layer functions, baseband functions, RF functions, and any combinations thereof) are performed at a CU 160, a DU 165, or an RU 170.
- functions e.g., network layer functions, protocol layer functions, baseband functions, RF functions, and any combinations thereof
- a functional split of a protocol stack may be employed between a CU 160 and a DU 165 such that the CU 160 may support one or more layers of the protocol stack and the DU 165 may support one or more different layers of the protocol stack.
- the CU 160 may host upper protocol layer (e.g., layer 3 (L3) , layer 2 (L2) ) functionality and signaling (e.g., Radio Resource Control (RRC) , service data adaption protocol (SDAP) , Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) ) .
- the CU 160 may be connected to one or more DUs 165 or RUs 170, and the one or more DUs 165 or RUs 170 may host lower protocol layers, such as layer 1 (L1) (e.g., physical (PHY) layer) or L2 (e.g., radio link control (RLC) layer, medium access control (MAC) layer) functionality and signaling, and may each be at least partially controlled by the CU 160.
- L1 e.g., physical (PHY) layer
- L2 e.g., radio link control (RLC) layer, medium access control (MAC) layer
- a functional split of the protocol stack may be employed between a DU 165 and an RU 170 such that the DU 165 may support one or more layers of the protocol stack and the RU 170 may support one or more different layers of the protocol stack.
- the DU 165 may support one or multiple different cells (e.g., via one or more RUs 170) .
- a functional split between a CU 160 and a DU 165, or between a DU 165 and an RU 170 may be within a protocol layer (e.g., some functions for a protocol layer may be performed by one of a CU 160, a DU 165, or an RU 170, while other functions of the protocol layer are performed by a different one of the CU 160, the DU 165, or the RU 170) .
- a CU 160 may be functionally split further into CU control plane (CU-CP) and CU user plane (CU-UP) functions.
- CU-CP CU control plane
- CU-UP CU user plane
- a CU 160 may be connected to one or more DUs 165 via a midhaul communication link 162 (e.g., F1, F1-c, F1-u) , and a DU 165 may be connected to one or more RUs 170 via a fronthaul communication link 168 (e.g., open fronthaul (FH) interface) .
- a midhaul communication link 162 or a fronthaul communication link 168 may be implemented in accordance with an interface (e.g., a channel) between layers of a protocol stack supported by respective network entities 105 that are in communication via such communication links.
- infrastructure and spectral resources for radio access may support wireless backhaul link capabilities to supplement wired backhaul connections, providing an IAB network architecture (e.g., to a core network 130) .
- IAB network one or more network entities 105 (e.g., IAB nodes 104) may be partially controlled by each other.
- One or more IAB nodes 104 may be referred to as a donor entity or an IAB donor.
- One or more DUs 165 or one or more RUs 170 may be partially controlled by one or more CUs 160 associated with a donor network entity 105 (e.g., a donor base station 140) .
- the one or more donor network entities 105 may be in communication with one or more additional network entities 105 (e.g., IAB nodes 104) via supported access and backhaul links (e.g., backhaul communication links 120) .
- IAB nodes 104 may include an IAB mobile termination (IAB-MT) controlled (e.g., scheduled) by DUs 165 of a coupled IAB donor.
- IAB-MT IAB mobile termination
- An IAB-MT may include an independent set of antennas for relay of communications with UEs 115, or may share the same antennas (e.g., of an RU 170) of an IAB node 104 used for access via the DU 165 of the IAB node 104 (e.g., referred to as virtual IAB-MT (vIAB-MT) ) .
- the IAB nodes 104 may include DUs 165 that support communication links with additional entities (e.g., IAB nodes 104, UEs 115) within the relay chain or configuration of the access network (e.g., downstream) .
- one or more components of the disaggregated RAN architecture e.g., one or more IAB nodes 104 or components of IAB nodes 104) may be configured to operate according to the techniques described herein.
- one or more components of the disaggregated RAN architecture may be configured to support mobility enhancements for RA procedures as described herein.
- some operations described as being performed by a UE 115 or a network entity 105 may additionally, or alternatively, be performed by one or more components of the disaggregated RAN architecture (e.g., IAB nodes 104, DUs 165, CUs 160, RUs 170, RIC 175, SMO 180) .
- a UE 115 may include or may be referred to as a mobile device, a wireless device, a remote device, a handheld device, or a subscriber device, or some other suitable terminology, where the “device” may also be referred to as a unit, a station, a terminal, or a client, among other examples.
- a UE 115 may also include or may be referred to as a personal electronic device such as a cellular phone, a personal digital assistant (PDA) , a tablet computer, a laptop computer, or a personal computer.
- PDA personal digital assistant
- a UE 115 may include or be referred to as a wireless local loop (WLL) station, an Internet of Things (IoT) device, an Internet of Everything (IoE) device, or a machine type communications (MTC) device, among other examples, which may be implemented in various objects such as appliances, or vehicles, meters, among other examples.
- WLL wireless local loop
- IoT Internet of Things
- IoE Internet of Everything
- MTC machine type communications
- the UEs 115 described herein may be able to communicate with various types of devices, such as other UEs 115 that may sometimes act as relays as well as the network entities 105 and the network equipment including macro eNBs or gNBs, small cell eNBs or gNBs, or relay base stations, among other examples, as shown in FIG. 1.
- devices such as other UEs 115 that may sometimes act as relays as well as the network entities 105 and the network equipment including macro eNBs or gNBs, small cell eNBs or gNBs, or relay base stations, among other examples, as shown in FIG. 1.
- the UEs 115 and the network entities 105 may wirelessly communicate with one another via one or more communication links 125 (e.g., an access link) using resources associated with one or more carriers.
- the term “carrier” may refer to a set of RF spectrum resources having a defined physical layer structure for supporting the communication links 125.
- a carrier used for a communication link 125 may include a portion of a RF spectrum band (e.g., a bandwidth part (BWP) ) that is operated according to one or more physical layer channels for a given radio access technology (e.g., LTE, LTE-A, LTE-A Pro, NR) .
- BWP bandwidth part
- Each physical layer channel may carry acquisition signaling (e.g., synchronization signals, system information) , control signaling that coordinates operation for the carrier, user data, or other signaling.
- the wireless communications system 100 may support communication with a UE 115 using carrier aggregation or multi-carrier operation.
- a UE 115 may be configured with multiple downlink component carriers and one or more uplink component carriers according to a carrier aggregation configuration.
- Carrier aggregation may be used with both frequency division duplexing (FDD) and time division duplexing (TDD) component carriers.
- Communication between a network entity 105 and other devices may refer to communication between the devices and any portion (e.g., entity, sub-entity) of a network entity 105.
- the terms “transmitting, ” “receiving, ” or “communicating, ” when referring to a network entity 105 may refer to any portion of a network entity 105 (e.g., a base station 140, a CU 160, a DU 165, a RU 170) of a RAN communicating with another device (e.g., directly or via one or more other network entities 105) .
- a network entity 105 e.g., a base station 140, a CU 160, a DU 165, a RU 170
- Signal waveforms transmitted via a carrier may be made up of multiple subcarriers (e.g., using multi-carrier modulation (MCM) techniques such as orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) or discrete Fourier transform spread OFDM (DFT-S-OFDM) ) .
- MCM multi-carrier modulation
- OFDM orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
- DFT-S-OFDM discrete Fourier transform spread OFDM
- a resource element may refer to resources of one symbol period (e.g., a duration of one modulation symbol) and one subcarrier, in which case the symbol period and subcarrier spacing may be inversely related.
- the quantity of bits carried by each resource element may depend on the modulation scheme (e.g., the order of the modulation scheme, the coding rate of the modulation scheme, or both) , such that a relatively higher quantity of resource elements (e.g., in a transmission duration) and a relatively higher order of a modulation scheme may correspond to a relatively higher rate of communication.
- a wireless communications resource may refer to a combination of an RF spectrum resource, a time resource, and a spatial resource (e.g., a spatial layer, a beam) , and the use of multiple spatial resources may increase the data rate or data integrity for communications with a UE 115.
- Time intervals of a communications resource may be organized according to radio frames each having a specified duration (e.g., 10 milliseconds (ms) ) .
- Each radio frame may be identified by a system frame number (SFN) (e.g., ranging from 0 to 1023) .
- SFN system frame number
- Each frame may include multiple consecutively-numbered subframes or slots, and each subframe or slot may have the same duration.
- a frame may be divided (e.g., in the time domain) into subframes, and each subframe may be further divided into a quantity of slots.
- each frame may include a variable quantity of slots, and the quantity of slots may depend on subcarrier spacing.
- Each slot may include a quantity of symbol periods (e.g., depending on the length of the cyclic prefix prepended to each symbol period) .
- a slot may further be divided into multiple mini-slots associated with one or more symbols. Excluding the cyclic prefix, each symbol period may be associated with one or more (e.g., N f ) sampling periods. The duration of a symbol period may depend on the subcarrier spacing or frequency band of operation.
- a subframe, a slot, a mini-slot, or a symbol may be the smallest scheduling unit (e.g., in the time domain) of the wireless communications system 100 and may be referred to as a transmission time interval (TTI) .
- TTI duration e.g., a quantity of symbol periods in a TTI
- the smallest scheduling unit of the wireless communications system 100 may be dynamically selected (e.g., in bursts of shortened TTIs (sTTIs) ) .
- Physical channels may be multiplexed for communication using a carrier according to various techniques.
- a physical control channel and a physical data channel may be multiplexed for signaling via a downlink carrier, for example, using one or more of time division multiplexing (TDM) techniques, frequency division multiplexing (FDM) techniques, or hybrid TDM-FDM techniques.
- a control region e.g., a control resource set (CORESET)
- CORESET control resource set
- One or more control regions may be configured for a set of the UEs 115.
- one or more of the UEs 115 may monitor or search control regions for control information according to one or more search space sets, and each search space set may include one or multiple control channel candidates in one or more aggregation levels arranged in a cascaded manner.
- An aggregation level for a control channel candidate may refer to an amount of control channel resources (e.g., control channel elements (CCEs) ) associated with encoded information for a control information format having a given payload size.
- Search space sets may include common search space sets configured for sending control information to multiple UEs 115 and UE-specific search space sets for sending control information to a specific UE 115.
- a network entity 105 may provide communication coverage via one or more cells, for example a macro cell, a small cell, a hot spot, or other types of cells, or any combination thereof.
- the term “cell” may refer to a logical communication entity used for communication with a network entity 105 (e.g., using a carrier) and may be associated with an identifier for distinguishing neighboring cells (e.g., a physical cell identifier (PCID) , a virtual cell identifier (VCID) , or others) .
- a cell also may refer to a coverage area 110 or a portion of a coverage area 110 (e.g., a sector) over which the logical communication entity operates.
- Such cells may range from smaller areas (e.g., a structure, a subset of structure) to larger areas depending on various factors such as the capabilities of the network entity 105.
- a cell may be or include a building, a subset of a building, or exterior spaces between or overlapping with coverage areas 110, among other examples.
- a macro cell generally covers a relatively large geographic area (e.g., several kilometers in radius) and may allow unrestricted access by the UEs 115 with service subscriptions with the network provider supporting the macro cell.
- a small cell may be associated with a lower-powered network entity 105 (e.g., a lower-powered base station 140) , as compared with a macro cell, and a small cell may operate using the same or different (e.g., licensed, unlicensed) frequency bands as macro cells.
- Small cells may provide unrestricted access to the UEs 115 with service subscriptions with the network provider or may provide restricted access to the UEs 115 having an association with the small cell (e.g., the UEs 115 in a closed subscriber group (CSG) , the UEs 115 associated with users in a home or office) .
- a network entity 105 may support one or multiple cells and may also support communications via the one or more cells using one or multiple component carriers.
- a carrier may support multiple cells, and different cells may be configured according to different protocol types (e.g., MTC, narrowband IoT (NB-IoT) , enhanced mobile broadband (eMBB) ) that may provide access for different types of devices.
- protocol types e.g., MTC, narrowband IoT (NB-IoT) , enhanced mobile broadband (eMBB)
- NB-IoT narrowband IoT
- eMBB enhanced mobile broadband
- a network entity 105 may be movable and therefore provide communication coverage for a moving coverage area 110.
- different coverage areas 110 associated with different technologies may overlap, but the different coverage areas 110 may be supported by the same network entity 105.
- the overlapping coverage areas 110 associated with different technologies may be supported by different network entities 105.
- the wireless communications system 100 may include, for example, a heterogeneous network in which different types of the network entities 105 provide coverage for various coverage areas 110 using the same or different radio access technologies.
- the wireless communications system 100 may be configured to support ultra-reliable communications or low-latency communications, or various combinations thereof.
- the wireless communications system 100 may be configured to support ultra-reliable low-latency communications (URLLC) .
- the UEs 115 may be designed to support ultra-reliable, low-latency, or critical functions.
- Ultra-reliable communications may include private communication or group communication and may be supported by one or more services such as push-to-talk, video, or data.
- Support for ultra-reliable, low-latency functions may include prioritization of services, and such services may be used for public safety or general commercial applications.
- the terms ultra-reliable, low-latency, and ultra-reliable low-latency may be used interchangeably herein.
- a UE 115 may be configured to support communicating directly with other UEs 115 via a device-to-device (D2D) communication link 135 (e.g., in accordance with a peer-to-peer (P2P) , D2D, or sidelink protocol) .
- D2D device-to-device
- P2P peer-to-peer
- one or more UEs 115 of a group that are performing D2D communications may be within the coverage area 110 of a network entity 105 (e.g., a base station 140, an RU 170) , which may support aspects of such D2D communications being configured by (e.g., scheduled by) the network entity 105.
- one or more UEs 115 of such a group may be outside the coverage area 110 of a network entity 105 or may be otherwise unable to or not configured to receive transmissions from a network entity 105.
- groups of the UEs 115 communicating via D2D communications may support a one-to-many (1: M) system in which each UE 115 transmits to each of the other UEs 115 in the group.
- a network entity 105 may facilitate the scheduling of resources for D2D communications.
- D2D communications may be carried out between the UEs 115 without an involvement of a network entity 105.
- the core network 130 may provide user authentication, access authorization, tracking, Internet Protocol (IP) connectivity, and other access, routing, or mobility functions.
- the core network 130 may be an evolved packet core (EPC) or 5G core (5GC) , which may include at least one control plane entity that manages access and mobility (e.g., a mobility management entity (MME) , an access and mobility management function (AMF) ) and at least one user plane entity that routes packets or interconnects to external networks (e.g., a serving gateway (S-GW) , a Packet Data Network (PDN) gateway (P-GW) , or a user plane function (UPF) ) .
- EPC evolved packet core
- 5GC 5G core
- MME mobility management entity
- AMF access and mobility management function
- S-GW serving gateway
- PDN Packet Data Network gateway
- UPF user plane function
- the control plane entity may manage non-access stratum (NAS) functions such as mobility, authentication, and bearer management for the UEs 115 served by the network entities 105 (e.g., base stations 140) associated with the core network 130.
- NAS non-access stratum
- User IP packets may be transferred through the user plane entity, which may provide IP address allocation as well as other functions.
- the user plane entity may be connected to IP services 150 for one or more network operators.
- the IP services 150 may include access to the Internet, Intranet (s) , an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) , or a Packet-Switched Streaming Service.
- IMS IP Multimedia Subsystem
- the wireless communications system 100 may operate using one or more frequency bands, which may be in the range of 300 megahertz (MHz) to 300 gigahertz (GHz) .
- the region from 300 MHz to 3 GHz is known as the ultra-high frequency (UHF) region or decimeter band because the wavelengths range from approximately one decimeter to one meter in length.
- UHF waves may be blocked or redirected by buildings and environmental features, which may be referred to as clusters, but the waves may penetrate structures sufficiently for a macro cell to provide service to the UEs 115 located indoors. Communications using UHF waves may be associated with smaller antennas and shorter ranges (e.g., less than 100 kilometers) compared to communications using the smaller frequencies and longer waves of the high frequency (HF) or very high frequency (VHF) portion of the spectrum below 300 MHz.
- HF high frequency
- VHF very high frequency
- the wireless communications system 100 may utilize both licensed and unlicensed RF spectrum bands.
- the wireless communications system 100 may employ License Assisted Access (LAA) , LTE-Unlicensed (LTE-U) radio access technology, or NR technology using an unlicensed band such as the 5 GHz industrial, scientific, and medical (ISM) band.
- LAA License Assisted Access
- LTE-U LTE-Unlicensed
- NR NR technology
- an unlicensed band such as the 5 GHz industrial, scientific, and medical (ISM) band.
- devices such as the network entities 105 and the UEs 115 may employ carrier sensing for collision detection and avoidance.
- operations using unlicensed bands may be based on a carrier aggregation configuration in conjunction with component carriers operating using a licensed band (e.g., LAA) .
- Operations using unlicensed spectrum may include downlink transmissions, uplink transmissions, P2P transmissions, or D2D transmissions, among other examples.
- a network entity 105 e.g., a base station 140, an RU 170
- a UE 115 may be equipped with multiple antennas, which may be used to employ techniques such as transmit diversity, receive diversity, multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) communications, or beamforming.
- the antennas of a network entity 105 or a UE 115 may be located within one or more antenna arrays or antenna panels, which may support MIMO operations or transmit or receive beamforming.
- one or more base station antennas or antenna arrays may be co-located at an antenna assembly, such as an antenna tower.
- antennas or antenna arrays associated with a network entity 105 may be located at diverse geographic locations.
- a network entity 105 may include an antenna array with a set of rows and columns of antenna ports that the network entity 105 may use to support beamforming of communications with a UE 115.
- a UE 115 may include one or more antenna arrays that may support various MIMO or beamforming operations.
- an antenna panel may support RF beamforming for a signal transmitted via an antenna port.
- Beamforming which may also be referred to as spatial filtering, directional transmission, or directional reception, is a signal processing technique that may be used at a transmitting device or a receiving device (e.g., a network entity 105, a UE 115) to shape or steer an antenna beam (e.g., a transmit beam, a receive beam) along a spatial path between the transmitting device and the receiving device.
- Beamforming may be achieved by combining the signals communicated via antenna elements of an antenna array such that some signals propagating along particular orientations with respect to an antenna array experience constructive interference while others experience destructive interference.
- the adjustment of signals communicated via the antenna elements may include a transmitting device or a receiving device applying amplitude offsets, phase offsets, or both to signals carried via the antenna elements associated with the device.
- the adjustments associated with each of the antenna elements may be defined by a beamforming weight set associated with a particular orientation (e.g., with respect to the antenna array of the transmitting device or receiving device, or with respect to some other orientation) .
- the UEs 115 and the network entities 105 may support retransmissions of data to increase the likelihood that data is received successfully.
- Hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) feedback is one technique for increasing the likelihood that data is received correctly via a communication link (e.g., a communication link 125, a D2D communication link 135) .
- HARQ may include a combination of error detection (e.g., using a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) ) , forward error correction (FEC) , and retransmission (e.g., automatic repeat request (ARQ) ) .
- FEC forward error correction
- ARQ automatic repeat request
- HARQ may improve throughput at the MAC layer in poor radio conditions (e.g., low signal-to-noise conditions) .
- a device may support same-slot HARQ feedback, in which case the device may provide HARQ feedback in a specific slot for data received via a previous symbol in the slot. In some other examples, the device may provide HARQ feedback in a subsequent slot, or according to some other time interval.
- the wireless communications system 100 may support one or more cell (e.g., network entity 105) switch procedures, which may be referred to as mobility procedures. That is, a UE 115 may communicate with a first network entity 105 (e.g., a primary cell (PCell) ) and may switch communications to a second network entity 105 (e.g., a secondary cell (SCell) ) according to a cell change procedure from the one or more cell change procedures.
- a first cell change procedure which may be referred to as a handover (HO) procedure
- the UE 115 may measure a communication link between the UE and the first network entity 105 at a Layer (L3) and transmit a measurement report indicating the L3 measurements to the first network entity 105.
- L3 Layer
- the first network entity 105 may transmit a control message (e.g., RRC message) to the UE 115 indicating one or more parameters associated with the UE 115 switching communications to the second network entity 105 (e.g., triggering reconfiguration for change of the PCell and release/add for SCells when applicable) .
- the UE 115 may switch communications to the second network entity 105 based on receiving the control message.
- the UE 115 may transmit the measurement report indicating the L3 measurements and may receive the control message indicating one or more parameters associated with the UE 115 switching communications to the second network entity 105. Additionally, the control message may indicate a set of conditions associated with the UE 115 switching communications to the second network entity 105. As such, the UE 115 may switch communications to the second network entity 105 based on satisfying one or more conditions of the set of conditions.
- a conditional HO CHO
- the one or more parameters may be associated with a L1, L2, or both, of the UE 115 (e.g., involved L1 and L2 resets) which may result in increased latency, increased overhead, and increases in a timeline associated with switching to the second network entity 105 (e.g., longer interruption time) .
- the UE 115 may support a third cell change procedure, which may be referred to as an LTM procedure (e.g., L1/L2 mobility enhancements) , in which the UE 115 may be triggered to switch communications to the second network entity 105 via L1 or L2 signaling to reduce latency, reduce overhead, and reduce the timeline associated with switching to the second network entity 105 (e.g., shorter interruption time) .
- the LTM procedure may support dynamic switching mechanisms among candidate network entities 105 (e.g., including SpCell and SCell) , enhancements for inter-cell beam management (e.g., including L1 measurement and reporting and beam indication) , TA management, or any combination thereof.
- the UE 115 may receive an indication of one or more resources associated with a RA procedure (e.g., RACH resources) to be performed by the UE 115 based on receiving a PDCCH order.
- the one or more resources may be associated with the second network entity 105 (e.g., candidate cell (S) ) .
- the UE 115 may receive the PDCCH order via a control message (e.g., DCI message) triggering the UE 115 to switch communications to the second network entity 105.
- a control message e.g., DCI message
- the PDCCH order may indicate a RA preamble index, an uplink or supplementary uplink indicator, a synchronization signal (SS) or physical broadcast channel (PBCH) index, a physical RACH (PRACH) mask index, one or more reserved bits, a PRACH occasion (RO) index associated with the second network entity 105, or any combination thereof.
- the PDCCH order may indicate the second network entity 105 (e.g., target cell candidate (s) ) via the one or more reserved bits.
- the UE 115 may switch communications to the second network entity 105 based on receiving the PDCCH order via a PDCCH-ordered RA procedure.
- a first enhancement may enable a first network entity 105, a second network entity 105, or both, to provide additional information to the UE prior to the PDCCH order to support early estimation of a timing advance (TA) , among other capabilities. That is, the UE may transmit, to the first network entity, a request for the UE to perform a PDCCH-ordered RA procedure and the first network entity, the second network entity, or both, may transmit, to the UE, the additional information including at least RA resources associated with the UE performing early TA measurement, such as uplink resources and downlink resources.
- TA timing advance
- a second enhancement may enable the PDCCH order triggering the RA procedure to indicate one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the initial message transmission to the second network entity.
- the one or more coverage enhancement schemes may indicate that one or more of the following enhancements may be enabled: repetition of the initial message in the time domain, repetition of the initial message in the frequency domain, frequency hopping of the initial message, and transmission beam switching of the initial message.
- a third enhancement may define a timeline associated with transmission of the PDCCH order and the initial message to support efficient resource utilization. For example, a duration between a last symbol of the PDCCH order and a first symbol of the initial message and/or a first symbol of a retransmission of the initial message may be within a specified time range.
- the lower threshold of the time range may be based on a capability of the UE, a time associated with switching a bandwidth part (BWP) , a frequency, a frequency range, a subcarrier spacing (SCS) , a switching mode of the UE, or any combination thereof.
- the upper threshold may be based on a validity period of the resources indicated by the PDCCH order.
- FIG. 2 shows an example of a wireless communications system 200 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the wireless communications system 200 may implement or be implemented by aspects of the wireless communication system 100.
- the wireless communications system 200 may include one or more network entities 105 (e.g., a network entity 105-a and a network entity 105-b) and one or more UEs 115 (e.g., a UE 115-a) , which may represent examples of corresponding devices as described with reference to FIG. 1.
- network entities 105 e.g., a network entity 105-a and a network entity 105-b
- UEs 115 e.g., a UE 115-a
- the wireless communications system 200 may support PDCCH-ordered RA procedures, as described with reference to FIG. 1.
- a UE 115-a may communicate with a network entity 105-a and may receive a PDCCH order 205 triggering the UE 115-a to switch communications to a network entity 105-b.
- the UE 115-a may transmit an initial message 210 to the network entity 105-b and may receive a RAR 215 in response to the initial message 210.
- a first transmission (e.g., first PRACH transmission) of the PDCCH order 205 may fail or the UE 115-a may not receive the RAR 215.
- the UE 115-a may reattempt the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure with the network entity 105-b (e.g., autonomous retransmission of the initial message 210 using contention free RA (CFRA) resources or fall back to contention based RA (CBRA) ) or may select an additional network entity 105 to attempt the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure, which may increase the latency of mobility and reduce the efficiency of RA (e.g., PRACH) resource utilization.
- failure of a PDCCH-ordered RA procedure may cause a resource bottleneck.
- techniques described herein may support enhancements to the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure to improve reliability and resource utilization and reduce latency of mobility procedures (e.g., CHO, HO, LTM) .
- the network entity 105-a, the network entity 105-b, or both may provide additional information (e.g., via a resource configuration 220) to the UE 115-a prior to the PDCCH order 205 to support early measurement (e.g., estimation) of a TA, among other capabilities.
- early measurement e.g., estimation
- the UE 115-a may communicate with the network entity 105-a and may transmit one or more measurement reports indicating measurements associated with a communication link between the UE 115-a and the network entity 105-a. Additionally, or alternatively, the UE 115-a may transmit a request message 225 (e.g., or UE assistance information (UAI) ) requesting for a PDCCH-ordered RA procedure. Additionally, the request message 225 may request system information (SI) associated with the network entity 105-b (e.g., candidate target cell (s) ) , may request one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure (e.g., towards the network entity 105-b) , or both.
- SI system information
- the network entity 105-a may transmit, to the network entity 105-b, a HO request 230 requesting for the network entity 105-b to perform the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure with the UE 115-a based on receiving the one or more measurement reports, receiving the UAI, receiving the request message 225, or any combination thereof.
- the network entity 105-b may transmit, to the network entity 105-a, a HO acknowledgment 235 indicating that the network entity 105-a accepted the request to perform the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure with the UE 115-a.
- the HO acknowledgment 235 may indicate one or more parameters (e.g., network assisted information) associated with the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure.
- the one or more parameters may include RA resource information (e.g., a resource configuration 220) associated with the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure.
- the network entity 105-a may transmit, to the UE 115-a, a resource configuration 220-a associated with the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure (e.g., to be used for network-initiated mobility, such as HO based on L3 measurements, or UE-initiated mobility, such as CHO or LTM) based on the RA resource information received from the network entity 105-b.
- a resource configuration 220-a associated with the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure e.g., to be used for network-initiated mobility, such as HO based on L3 measurements, or UE-initiated mobility, such as CHO or LTM
- the resource configuration 220-a may indicate RA resources to be used by the UE 115-a to enable early TA measurement for one or more network entities 105, including at least the network entity 105-b.
- the resource configuration 220-a may indicate at least one uplink BWP (e.g., a set of uplink resources) associated with the network entity 105-b (e.g., for early TA measurement) and at least one downlink BWP (e.g., a set of downlink resources) associated with (e.g., linked to) the at least one uplink bandwidth part.
- the network entity 105-b may measure a TA associated with the network entity 105-b based on the UE 115-a transmitting an initial message 210 in accordance with the at least one uplink BWP, the at least one downlink BWP, or both.
- the resource configuration 220-a may indicate one or more uplink channels or signals (e.g., PRACH, physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) , physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) , sounding reference signal (SRS) ) within the at least one uplink BWP, one or more patterns associated with one or more coverage enhancement schemes (e.g., patterns of coverage enhancement schemes in a time domain, a frequency domain, a space domain, or a code domain) , one or more parameters associated with the one or more patterns, or any combination thereof.
- uplink channels or signals e.g., PRACH, physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) , physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) , sounding reference signal (SRS)
- PRACH Physical uplink shared channel
- PUCCH physical uplink control channel
- SRS sounding reference signal
- the one or more patterns may include a repetition pattern associated with an initial message 210 in a time domain or a frequency domain, a switching pattern of a transmission beam used to transmit the initial message 210, a hopping pattern of the initial message 210 in the frequency domain (e.g., or sequence) , or any combination thereof. Additionally, the one or more parameters associated with the one or more patterns may include a threshold (e.g., maximum) quantity of repetitions, a threshold quantity of beam switches, a threshold quantity of hops, or any combination thereof.
- a threshold e.g., maximum
- the resource configuration 220-a may indicate one or more downlink channels or signals (e.g., PDCCH, physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) , downlink reference signals) associated with the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure (e.g., RAR, contention resolution, reference signal receive power (RSRP) measurement) .
- the at least one downlink BWP may be associated with (e.g., configured on) the network entity 105-b (e.g., candidate target cell) .
- a RAR 215 of the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure may be quasi-co-located (QCL’ed) with one or more reference signals indicated via a PDCCH order 205 (e.g., DCI) of the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure.
- the RAR 215 may include a TA command based on the TA measured by the network entity 105-b.
- the UE 115-a may transmit, to the network entity 105-b, a feedback message (e.g., PUCCH carrying HARQ feedback) responsive to the RAR 215 (e.g., contention resolution) in accordance with (e.g., using) a first spatial filter, where the first spatial filter is the same as a spatial filter used to transmit the initial message 210 (e.g., msg1/msgA transmission ordered by the PDCCH order 205) .
- a feedback message e.g., PUCCH carrying HARQ feedback
- the RAR 215 e.g., contention resolution
- the at least one downlink BWP may be associated with the network entity 105-a (e.g., source cell) .
- the RAR 215 may be QCL’ed with a downlink control channel (e.g., PDCCH) used to receive the PDCCH order 205.
- a downlink control channel e.g., PDCCH
- the UE 115-a may transmit, to the network entity 105-b, the feedback message responsive to the RAR 215 in accordance with (e.g., using) a second spatial filter, where the second spatial filter is associated with a transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state which is further associated with the downlink control channel (e.g., PDCCH) used to receive the PDCCH order 205 or a downlink control channel (e.g., PDCCH or PDSCH) used to receive the RAR 215. That is, the spatial filter and the downlink control channel used to receive the PDCCH order 205 or the downlink control channel used to receive the RAR 215 may be associated with a same TCI state.
- TCI transmission configuration indicator
- the network entity 105-a may transmit, to the UE 115-a, a TA command based on the TA measured by the network entity 105-b (e.g., based on receiving an indication of the TA from the network entity 105-b) .
- the network entity 105-a may transmit the resource configuration 220-a via SI, a MAC-CE message, or a DCI message.
- the resource configuration 220-a may indicate (e.g., via a configured grant or RRC message) a set of uplink data resource (e.g., PUSCH) or a set of uplink control resources (e.g., PUCCH) associated with (e.g., configured on) the network entity 105-b for transmission of a first uplink message (e.g., by the UE 115-a to the network entity 104-a) after switching (e.g., cell switching) from the network entity 105-a to the network entity 105-b.
- a set of uplink data resource e.g., PUSCH
- a set of uplink control resources e.g., PUCCH
- the UE 115-a may receive (e.g., autonomously or within a configured time window) , from the network entity 105-b via broadcast, a resource configuration 220-b.
- the resource configuration 220-b may include SI associated with the network entity 105-b.
- the SI may be associated with the at least one DL BWP, one or more downlink reference signals, one or more parameters associated with resources further associated with the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure (e.g., information that may be included in the resource configuration 220-a) , or any combination thereof.
- the UE 115-a may receive SI associated with the network entity 105-b from the network entity 105-a (e.g., via a dedicated RRC message) .
- the UE 115-a may transmit, to the network entity 105-a (e.g., or the network entity 105-b, or both) an acknowledgment message 240 in response to the resource configuration 220-a, the resource configuration 220-b, or both.
- the network entity 105-a e.g., or the network entity 105-b, or both
- an acknowledgment message 240 in response to the resource configuration 220-a, the resource configuration 220-b, or both.
- the network entity 105-a may transmit, to the UE 115-a, the PDCCH order 205 triggering the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure.
- the PDCCH order 205 may include information associated with mobility enhancements associated with the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure (e.g., via one or more reserved bits, one or more bits associated with an uplink or supplementary indicator, or both) .
- the PDCCH order 205 may include an identifier associated with the network entity 105-b (e.g., identify of the candidate target cell) , an uplink BWP associated with early TA measurement, or both.
- the identifier associated with the network entity 105-b may be a physical cell identifier (e.g., 10 bits) , an index associated with the network entity 105-b (e.g., less than 10 bits) from a set of indices associated with additional network entities 105 (e.g., from a network configured list of candidate target cells) , or both.
- the PDCCH order 205 may include a BWP index associated with the uplink BWP (e.g., if multiple uplink BWPs of the network entity 105-b are configured for the UE 115-a) .
- the PDCCH order 205 may indicate one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the initial message 210 (e.g., to be transmitted to the network entity 105-b.
- a first coverage enhancement scheme may be associated with repeating transmission of the initial message 210 in a time domain
- a third coverage enhancement scheme may be associated with frequency hopping the initial message 210 (e.g., with a same or different PRACH sequence in different hops)
- a fourth coverage enhancement scheme may be associated with switching a transmission beam associated with the initial message 210 (e.g., with a same or different PRACH sequence on different transmit beams) .
- the PDCCH order 205 may indicate a combination (e.g., selective combination, hybrid) of the coverage enhancement schemes.
- the PDCCH order 205 may indicate which coverage enhancements schemes may be supported (e.g., in the time domain, frequency domain, space domain, or code domain) by the network entity 105-b for the initial message 210 (e.g., may indicate if none of the coverage enhancement schemes are supported) .
- the PDCCH order 205 may indicate one or more parameters associated with the one or more coverage enhancement schemes.
- the PDCCH order 205 may indicate a quantity (e.g., total number) of repetitions associated with the first coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of repetitions associated with the second coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of frequency hops associated with the third coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of beam switches associated with the fourth coverage enhancement scheme, an index associated with a pattern further associated with a coverage enhancement scheme of the one or more coverage enhancement schemes, or any combination thereof.
- a pattern may be a repetition pattern in the time domain or the frequency domain, a hopping pattern in the frequency domain (e.g., or sequence) , a switching pattern of transmit beams, or any combination thereof.
- the PDCCH order 205 may indicate whether the UE may retransmit (e.g., autonomously) the initial message 210 prior to expiration of a timer (e.g., RRC-configured timer) .
- a timer e.g., RRC-configured timer
- the resource configuration 220-a, the resource configuration 220-b, or both may indicate the timer (e.g., duration associated with the timer) .
- the UE 115-a may receive an additional control message indicating the timer.
- the PDCCH order 205 may activate the set of uplink data resource (e.g., PUSCH) or the set of uplink control resources (e.g., PUCCH) associated with the network entity 105-b for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the network entity 105-a to the network entity 105-b.
- the set of uplink data resource e.g., PUSCH
- the set of uplink control resources e.g., PUCCH
- the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure may not be associated with mobility of the UE 115-a (e.g., not used for mobility) .
- the PDCCH order 205 may not include the identifier associated with the network entity 105-b, may include the uplink or supplementary uplink indicator (e.g., rather than repurposing bits associated with the uplink or supplementary uplink indicator for the information associated with mobility enhancements) , or both.
- the PDCCH order 205 may (e.g., via other fields) include the information associated with mobility enhancements, information associated with retransmission of the initial message 210, or both.
- control message including the PDCCH order 205 may include codepoints associated with the PDCCH order 205, codepoints associated with the information associated with mobility enhancements, information associated with retransmission of the initial message 210, or both, one or more reserved bits, or any combination thereof.
- the UE 115-a may perform the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure based on receiving the PDCCH order 205. For example, the UE 115-a may transmit the initial message 210 (e.g., to the network entity 105-a or the network entity 105-b) and may receive the RAR 215 (e.g., from the network entity 105-a or the network entity 105-b, respectively) . Additionally, or alternatively, the UE 115-a, the network entity 105-a, the network entity 105-b, or any combination thereof, may support a timeline associated with transmission of the PDCCH order 205 and the initial message 210 to support efficient resource utilization, as described with reference to FIG. 3.
- the UE 115-a may transmit the first uplink message after switching from the network entity 105-a to the network entity 105-b via the set of uplink data resources or the set of uplink control resources indicated via the resource configuration 220-a and activate via the PDCCH order 205.
- the UE 115- a may transmit, to the network entity 105-b, the first uplink message based on the TA associated with the network entity 105-b (e.g., obtained via the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure prior to cell switching) and the set of uplink data resources or the set of uplink control resources.
- the techniques described herein may support early TA measurement for PDCCH-ordered RA procedures.
- the techniques described herein may be considered with regards to additional use cases of PDCCH-ordered RA procedures, such as uplink synchronization or resynchronization of serving cells (e.g., network entities 105) .
- FIG. 3 shows an example of a timing diagram 300 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the timing diagram 300 may implement or be implemented by aspects of the wireless communication system 100 or the wireless communications system 200.
- the timing diagram 300 may be implemented by one or more network entities 105 and one or more UEs 115, which may represent examples of corresponding devices as described with reference to FIG. 1.
- multiple wireless devices such as a UE 115 and one or more network entities 105, may support a timeline associated with transmission of a PDCCH order 305 (e.g., via a DCI message) and an initial message 310 of a RA procedure (e.g., triggered by the PDCCH order) .
- a PDCCH order 305 e.g., via a DCI message
- an initial message 310 of a RA procedure e.g., triggered by the PDCCH order
- the UE 115 may switch from a first network entity 105 (e.g., source cell) to a second network entity 105 (e.g., candidate target cell) to initiate transmission of the initial message 310 (e.g., msg1/msgA) of the RA procedure (e.g., including coverage enhancements indicated in the DCI message carrying the PDCCH order 305) based on receiving the PDCCH order 305.
- a first network entity 105 e.g., source cell
- a second network entity 105 e.g., candidate target cell
- the initial message 310 e.g., msg1/msgA
- the RA procedure e.g., including coverage enhancements indicated in the DCI message carrying the PDCCH order 305
- a gap between a last symbol of the PDCCH order 305, such as a symbol 315-a, and a first symbol of a first transmission of the initial message 310, such as a symbol 315-b of the initial message 310-a, or a first symbol of a retransmission of the initial message 310, such as a symbol 315-c of the initial message 310-b, may be greater than a first threshold, T L , and less than second threshold, T U .
- transmission of the symbol 315-b of the initial message 310-a, at T1 may be within a duration of reception of the symbol 315-a of the PDCCH order 305, at T0, where the duration is based on the first threshold and the second threshold. That is, the duration 320-a (e.g., T1-T0) may be greater than the first threshold and less than the second threshold.
- transmission of the symbol 315-c of initial message 310-b e.g., a grant-free, autonomous retransmission
- transmission of the symbol 315-c of initial message 310-b e.g., a grant-free, autonomous retransmission
- transmission of the symbol 315-c of initial message 310-b e.g., a grant-free, autonomous retransmission
- the duration 320-b e.g., T2-T0
- the first threshold (e.g., T L ) may be associated with a validity period of resources (e.g., PRACH/msgA resources) indicated by the PDCCH order 305, where the resources indicated by the PDCCH order 305 are allocated to the UE 115 for transmission of the initial message 310 (e.g., while the timer is active) .
- the first threshold may be associated with a timer (e.g., configured by a network entity 105 via RRC) for CFRA.
- the network entity 105 may release a reservation of the resources allocated to the UE 115 for transmission of the initial message 310 (e.g., including extra resources used for coverage enhancements) based on expiration of the timer and may reassign the resources to other UEs 115.
- the timer may expire based on failing to receive the initial message 310 (e.g., PDCCH-ordered RA procedure is not fulfilled) .
- N T, 2A may represent a duration (e.g., time duration) of N 2A symbols, where N 2A is based on a capability of the UE 115 and corresponds to a preparation time for transmission of the initial message 310 (e.g., PRACH/PUSCH transmission) with coverage enhancements (e.g., assuming a reference SCS is a minimum SCS configuration among the PDCCH order 305 (e.g., source cell) , the PRACH (e.g., candidate target cell) , and the PUSCH (e.g., candidate target cell) ) .
- the initial message 310 e.g., PRACH/PUSCH transmission
- coverage enhancements e.g., assuming a reference SCS is a minimum SCS configuration among the PDCCH order 305 (e.g., source cell) , the PRACH (e.g., candidate target cell) , and the PUSCH (e.g., candidate target cell) ) .
- ⁇ Delay may represent a delay associated with a frequency for transmission of the initial message 310 (e.g., 0.5 ms for FR1 and 0.25 ms for FR2) and T switch may represent a switching duration based on a frequency range (e.g., supported by the UE 115) , a reference SCS, a UE 115 capability, and a switching mode of the UE 115 (e.g., configured by RRC) .
- the UE 115 may support two transmission chains, 2TX, on one carrier (e.g., source cell or the candidate target cell) or one transmission chain, 1TX, on each of two carriers (e.g., source cell and the candidate target cell) .
- the UE 115 may support a switching time of “1TX-2TX” (e.g., based on ⁇ OneT ⁇ being configured by RRC parameter uplinkTXSwitching-DualUL-TxState) or “2TX-2TX” (e.g., otherwise) .
- the reference SCS may be based on a threshold (e.g., minimum) SCS of a PDCCH, PRACH, PUSCH, or PUSCH transmission associated with the first network entity 105 (e.g., source cell) or the second network entity 105 (e.g., candidate target cells) .
- the reference SCS may be based on a set of rules associated with intra-frequency or inter-frequency cell-level mobility.
- FIG. 4 shows an example of a process flow 400 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the process flow 400 may implement or be implemented by aspects of the wireless communication system 100, the wireless communications system 200, or the timing diagram 300.
- the wireless communications system 200 may be implemented by one or more network entities 105 (e.g., a network entity 105-c and a network entity 105-d) and one or more UEs 115 (e.g., a UE 115-b) , which may represent examples of corresponding devices as described with reference to FIG. 1.
- network entities 105 e.g., a network entity 105-c and a network entity 105-d
- UEs 115 e.g., a UE 115-b
- the UE 115-b may transmit one or more measurement reports, UAI, or both, to the network entity 105-c.
- the UE 115-b may transmit, to the network entity 105-c, a first request, which may be referred to as a RACH request, requesting a PDCCH-ordered RA procedure, where the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message (e.g., a PDCCH order) from the network entity 105-c ordering the UE 115-b to transmit a RA message to the network entity 105-d.
- a first request which may be referred to as a RACH request
- a PDCCH-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message (e.g., a PDCCH order) from the network entity 105-c ordering the UE 115-b to transmit a RA message to the network entity 105-d.
- a DCI message e.g., a PDCCH order
- the network entity 105-c may transmit, to the network entity 105-d, a second request, which may be referred to as a HO request, requesting for the network entity 105-d to perform the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure with the UE 115-b based on receiving the measurement report, the UAI, the RACH request, or any combination thereof, from the UE 115-b.
- a second request which may be referred to as a HO request, requesting for the network entity 105-d to perform the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure with the UE 115-b based on receiving the measurement report, the UAI, the RACH request, or any combination thereof, from the UE 115-b.
- the network entity 105-c may receive, from the network entity 105-d and responsive to the HO request, an acknowledgment message, which may be referred to as a HO acknowledgment, indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure (e.g., a RA resource configuration) .
- an acknowledgment message which may be referred to as a HO acknowledgment, indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure (e.g., a RA resource configuration) .
- the UE 115-b may receive, from the network entity 105-c and responsive to the measurement report, the UAI, the RACH request, or any combination thereof, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a first RA resource configuration including a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure.
- the set of uplink resources may include at least one uplink BWP associated with the network entity 105-d and one or more first resources configured for the PDCCH-ordered procedure.
- the set of downlink resources may include at least one downlink BWP associated with the at least one uplink BWP and one or more downlink reference signals associated with the one or more first resources configured for the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure.
- the first set of control messages may further indicate parameters associated with one or more uplink channels associated with the at least one uplink BWP, one or more reference numerologies, one or more preamble formats, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one uplink BWP, one or more repetition patterns associated with an initial message of the RA communications, one or more frequency hopping patterns associated with the initial message, one or more beam switch patterns associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of repetitions of the initial message, a threshold quantity of frequency hops associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of beam switches associated with the initial message, a set of uplink data resource or uplink control resources associated with the second network entity for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity, one or more downlink channels associated with the at least one downlink bandwidth part, one or more control resource sets, one or more search space sets, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one downlink BWP, or any combination thereof.
- the first set of control messages may indicate one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the RA communications.
- the one or more coverage enhancement schemes indicated by the first set of control messages may be indicative of a first coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of the initial message of the RA communications in a time domain, a second coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of the initial message in a frequency domain, a third coverage enhancement scheme associated with frequency hopping of the initial message, a fourth coverage enhancement scheme associated with switching a transmission beam associated with the initial message, or any combination thereof.
- the first set of control messages may further indicate a quantity of repetitions associated with the first coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of repetitions associated with the second coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of frequency hops associated with the third coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of beam switches associated with the fourth coverage enhancement scheme, an index associated with a pattern further associated with a coverage enhancement scheme of the one or more coverage enhancement schemes, oy any combination thereof.
- the first set of control messages may include one or more SI messages, one or more RRC messages, one or more MAC-CE messages, one or more second DCI messages, or any combination thereof.
- the UE 115-b may receive, from the network entity 105-d, a second set of control messages indicating a second RA resource configuration including SI associated with the network entity 105-d. That is, the second set of control messages may indicate one or more parameters associated with the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure, the network entity 105-d, or both.
- the UE 115-b may transmit, to the network entity 105-c, an acknowledgment message in response to receiving the first set of control messages.
- the UE 115-b may receive, from the network entity 105-c, the DCI message indicating the PDCCH order.
- the DCI message may indicate an identifier associated with the network entity 105-d, an identifier associated with the at least one uplink BWP further associated with the RA communications, or both.
- the DCI message may indicate one or more selected coverage enhancement schemes from the one or more coverage enhancement schemes indicated in the first set of control messages for the initial message of the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure.
- the DCI message may indicate whether the UE 115-b may retransmit the initial message of the RA communications prior to expiration of a timer, where a control message of the first control messages includes an indication of the timer and where the UE 115-b initiates the timer based on receiving a last symbol of the DCI message. Additionally, or alternatively, the DCI message may indicate an activation of the set of uplink data resource or uplink control resources associated with the second network entity for transmission of the first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity.
- the UE 115-b may participate in RA communications with the network entity 105-c, the network entity 105-d, or both, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources, the set of downlink resources, or both, indicated by the first set of control messages (e.g., the first RA resource configuration) .
- the first set of control messages e.g., the first RA resource configuration
- the UE 115-b may transmit, to the network entity 105-d, the initial message (e.g., msg1/msgA) , which may be referred to as a PRACH, of the RA communications based on the first set of control messages.
- the initial message e.g., msg1/msgA
- PRACH Physical Random Access Control Channel
- a first duration between reception of a last symbol of the DCI message and transmission of a first symbol of the initial message may satisfy one or more threshold. That is, the first duration may exceed a first threshold of the one or more thresholds and fail to exceed a second threshold of the one or more thresholds.
- the first threshold may be based on a capability of the UE 115-b, a coverage enhancement scheme indicated to the UE 115-b, a duration associated with switching a BWP, a carrier frequency, a frequency range, and a subcarrier spacing between the network entity 105-c and the network entity 105-d, a processing delay, a cell re-selection delay, a transmit chain switching mode of the UE 115-b, or any combination thereof.
- the second threshold may be based on a validity period associated with the DCI message (e.g., with the set of uplink resources for transmitting the initial message) .
- the UE 115-b may transmit a retransmission of the initial message of the RA communications based on transmitting the initial message, where a second duration between reception of the last symbol of the DCI message and transmission of a first symbol of the retransmission may satisfy the one or more threshold
- the network entity 105-d may determine (e.g., measure) a TA associated with the network entity 105-d based on receiving the initial message of the RA communications.
- the UE 115-b may obtain the TA associated with the network entity 105-d based on performing a portion of the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources, where the set of uplink resources, the set of downlink resources, or both, are associated with the network entity 105-c, the network entity 105-d, or both.
- the set of downlink resources may be associated with the network entity 105-d (e.g., the downlink BWP is configured on the network entity 105-d) and the UE 115-b may receive a TA command associated with the network entity 105-d from the network entity 105-d (e.g., via the RAR) .
- the set of downlink resources may be associated with the network entity 105-c (e.g., the downlink BWP is configured on the network entity 105-d) and the network entity 105-d may transmit an indication of the TA command to the network entity 105-c.
- the network entity 105-c may forward the TA command to the UE 115-b.
- a downlink control channel used to receive the TA command may be QCL’ed with a downlink control channel used to receive the DCI message (e.g., PDCCH order) .
- the at least one downlink BWP may be associated with the network entity 105-d.
- the UE 115-b may receive a RA response (RAR) of the RA communications, where a downlink control channel used to receive the RAR is QCL’ed with a downlink reference signal associated with the initial message or with one or more reference signals indicated via the DCI message (e.g., PDCCH order) .
- the UE 115-b may transmit, to the network entity 105-d and responsive to the RAR, a feedback message of the RA communications in accordance with one or more first spatial filters, where at least one of the one or more first spatial filters is associated with a beam switch pattern of the initial message.
- the at least one downlink BWP may be associated with the network entity 105-c.
- the downlink control channel used to receive the RAR may be QCL’ed with a downlink control channel used to receive the DCI message (e.g., PDCCH order) .
- the UE 115-b may transmit the feedback message of the RA communications in accordance with a second spatial filter, the second spatial filter is associated with a TCI state further associated with the downlink control channel used to receive the DCI message (e.g., PDCCH order) , the downlink control channel used to receive the TA command, or the downlink control channel used to receive the RAR.
- FIG. 5 shows a block diagram 500 of a device 505 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the device 505 may be an example of aspects of a UE 115 as described herein.
- the device 505 may include a receiver 510, a transmitter 515, and a communications manager 520.
- the device 505 may also include a processor. Each of these components may be in communication with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) .
- the receiver 510 may provide a means for receiving information such as packets, user data, control information, or any combination thereof associated with various information channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels related to mobility enhancements for RA procedures) . Information may be passed on to other components of the device 505.
- the receiver 510 may utilize a single antenna or a set of multiple antennas.
- the transmitter 515 may provide a means for transmitting signals generated by other components of the device 505.
- the transmitter 515 may transmit information such as packets, user data, control information, or any combination thereof associated with various information channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels related to mobility enhancements for RA procedures) .
- the transmitter 515 may be co-located with a receiver 510 in a transceiver module.
- the transmitter 515 may utilize a single antenna or a set of multiple antennas.
- the communications manager 520, the receiver 510, the transmitter 515, or various combinations thereof or various components thereof may be examples of means for performing various aspects of mobility enhancements for RA procedures as described herein.
- the communications manager 520, the receiver 510, the transmitter 515, or various combinations or components thereof may support a method for performing one or more of the functions described herein.
- the communications manager 520, the receiver 510, the transmitter 515, or various combinations or components thereof may be implemented in hardware (e.g., in communications management circuitry) .
- the hardware may include a processor, a digital signal processor (DSP) , a central processing unit (CPU) , an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) , a field-programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, a microcontroller, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof configured as or otherwise supporting a means for performing the functions described in the present disclosure.
- DSP digital signal processor
- CPU central processing unit
- ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
- FPGA field-programmable gate array
- a processor and memory coupled with the processor may be configured to perform one or more of the functions described herein (e.g., by executing, by the processor, instructions stored in the memory) .
- the communications manager 520 may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, obtaining, monitoring, outputting, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the receiver 510, the transmitter 515, or both.
- the communications manager 520 may receive information from the receiver 510, send information to the transmitter 515, or be integrated in combination with the receiver 510, the transmitter 515, or both to obtain information, output information, or perform various other operations as described herein.
- the communications manager 520 may support wireless communications at a UE in accordance with examples as disclosed herein.
- the communications manager 520 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity.
- the communications manager 520 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the communications manager 520 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from the first network entity, the downlink control information message.
- the communications manager 520 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for participating in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the downlink control information message, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
- the device 505 e.g., a processor controlling or otherwise coupled with the receiver 510, the transmitter 515, the communications manager 520, or a combination thereof
- the device 505 may support techniques for PDCCH-ordered RA procedure enhancements which may result in reduced processing, reduced power consumption, more efficient utilization of communication resources, among other advantages.
- FIG. 6 shows a block diagram 600 of a device 605 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the device 605 may be an example of aspects of a device 505 or a UE 115 as described herein.
- the device 605 may include a receiver 610, a transmitter 615, and a communications manager 620.
- the device 605 may also include a processor. Each of these components may be in communication with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) .
- the receiver 610 may provide a means for receiving information such as packets, user data, control information, or any combination thereof associated with various information channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels related to mobility enhancements for RA procedures) . Information may be passed on to other components of the device 605.
- the receiver 610 may utilize a single antenna or a set of multiple antennas.
- the transmitter 615 may provide a means for transmitting signals generated by other components of the device 605.
- the transmitter 615 may transmit information such as packets, user data, control information, or any combination thereof associated with various information channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels related to mobility enhancements for RA procedures) .
- the transmitter 615 may be co-located with a receiver 610 in a transceiver module.
- the transmitter 615 may utilize a single antenna or a set of multiple antennas.
- the device 605, or various components thereof may be an example of means for performing various aspects of mobility enhancements for RA procedures as described herein.
- the communications manager 620 may include a request component 625, a configuration component 630, a RA procedure component 635, or any combination thereof.
- the communications manager 620 may be an example of aspects of a communications manager 520 as described herein.
- the communications manager 620, or various components thereof may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, obtaining, monitoring, outputting, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the receiver 610, the transmitter 615, or both.
- the communications manager 620 may receive information from the receiver 610, send information to the transmitter 615, or be integrated in combination with the receiver 610, the transmitter 615, or both to obtain information, output information, or perform various other operations as described herein.
- the communications manager 620 may support wireless communications at a UE in accordance with examples as disclosed herein.
- the request component 625 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity.
- the configuration component 630 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the RA procedure component 635 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from the first network entity, the downlink control information message.
- the RA procedure component 635 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for participating in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the downlink control information message, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
- FIG. 7 shows a block diagram 700 of a communications manager 720 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the communications manager 720 may be an example of aspects of a communications manager 520, a communications manager 620, or both, as described herein.
- the communications manager 720, or various components thereof, may be an example of means for performing various aspects of mobility enhancements for RA procedures as described herein.
- the communications manager 720 may include a request component 725, a configuration component 730, a RA procedure component 735, a timing advance component 740, or any combination thereof. Each of these components may communicate, directly or indirectly, with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) .
- the communications manager 720 may support wireless communications at a UE in accordance with examples as disclosed herein.
- the request component 725 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity.
- the configuration component 730 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the RA procedure component 735 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from the first network entity, the downlink control information message.
- the RA procedure component 735 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for participating in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the downlink control information message, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
- the timing advance component 740 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for obtaining a timing advance associated with the second network entity based on performing a portion of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages, where the set of uplink resources, the set of downlink resources, or both, are associated with the first network entity, the second network entity, or both.
- the set of uplink resources includes at least one uplink bandwidth part associated with the second network entity and one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure. In some examples, the set of downlink resources includes at least one downlink bandwidth part associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part and one or more downlink reference signals associated with the one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the first set of control messages are further indicative of parameters associated with one or more uplink channels associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part, one or more reference numerologies, one or more preamble formats, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part, one or more repetition patterns associated with an initial message of the RA communications, one or more frequency hopping patterns associated with the initial message, one or more beam switch patterns associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of repetitions of the initial message, a threshold quantity of frequency hops associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of beam switches associated with the initial message, a set of uplink data resource or uplink control resources associated with the second network entity for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity, one or more downlink channels associated with the at least one downlink bandwidth part, one or more control resource sets, one or more search space sets, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one downlink bandwidth part, or any combination thereof.
- the RA procedure component 735 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving a downlink reference signal associated with an initial message of the RA communications and a RA response of the RA communications, where the RA response is quasi-co-located with the downlink reference signal or one or more reference signals indicated via a the downlink control information message.
- the RA procedure component 735 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting, to the second network entity and responsive to the RA response, a feedback message of the RA communications in accordance with one or more spatial filters, where at least one of the one or more spatial filters is associated with a beam switch pattern of the initial message of the RA communications.
- the RA procedure component 735 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving a timing advance command or a RA response of the RA communications associated with the second network entity, where a downlink control channel used to receive the timing advance command or a downlink control channel used to receive the RA response is quasi-co-located with a downlink control channel used to receive a the downlink control information message.
- the RA procedure component 735 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting, to the first network entity and responsive to the RA response, a feedback message of the RA communications according to a spatial filter, where the spatial filter is associated with a transmission configuration indicator state further associated with the downlink control channel used to receive the downlink control information message, the downlink control channel used to receive the timing advance command, or the downlink control channel used to receive the RA response.
- the first set of control messages include one or more system information messages, one or more radio resource control messages, one or more medium access control-control element messages, one or more second downlink control information messages, or any combination thereof.
- the configuration component 730 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from the second network entity, a second set of control messages that are indicative of one or more parameters associated with the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the downlink control information message is indicative of an identifier associated with the second network entity, an identifier associated with an uplink bandwidth part further associated with the RA communications, or both.
- the first set of control messages are indicative of one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the RA communications.
- the downlink control information message is indicative of a coverage enhancement scheme from the one or more coverage enhancement schemes selected for an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the one or more coverage enhancement schemes indicated by the first set of control messages are indicative of a first coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of an initial message of the RA communications in a time domain, a second coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of the initial message in a frequency domain, a third coverage enhancement scheme associated with frequency hopping of the initial message, a fourth coverage enhancement scheme associated with switching a transmission beam associated with the initial message, or any combination thereof.
- the first set of control messages are further indicative of a quantity of repetitions associated with the first coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of repetitions associated with the second coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of frequency hops associated with the third coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of beam switches associated with the fourth coverage enhancement scheme, an index associated with a pattern further associated with a coverage enhancement scheme of the one or more coverage enhancement schemes, oy any combination thereof.
- the downlink control information message is indicative of an activation of a set of uplink data resources or uplink control resources for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity or is indicative of whether the UE may retransmit an initial message of the RA communications prior to expiration of a timer.
- a control message of the first set of control messages includes an indication of the timer.
- the UE initiates the timer based on receiving a last symbol of a the downlink control information message.
- the RA procedure component 735 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting an initial message of the RA communications based on the first set of control messages, where a first duration between reception of a last symbol of the downlink control information message and transmission of a first symbol of the initial message satisfies one or more thresholds.
- the RA procedure component 735 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting a retransmission of the initial message of the RA communications based on transmitting the initial message, where a second duration between reception of the last symbol of the downlink control information message and transmission of a first symbol of the retransmission satisfies the one or more thresholds.
- the first duration exceeds a first threshold of the one or more thresholds and fails to exceed a second threshold of the one or more thresholds.
- the first threshold is based on a capability of the UE, a coverage enhancement scheme indicated to the UE, a duration associated with switching a bandwidth part, a carrier frequency, a frequency range and a subcarrier spacing between the first network entity and the second network entity, a processing delay, a cell re-selection delay, a transmit chain switching mode of the UE, or any combination thereof.
- the second threshold is based on a validity period associated with the downlink control information message.
- FIG. 8 shows a diagram of a system 800 including a device 805 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the device 805 may be an example of or include the components of a device 505, a device 605, or a UE 115 as described herein.
- the device 805 may communicate (e.g., wirelessly) with one or more network entities 105, one or more UEs 115, or any combination thereof.
- the device 805 may include components for bi-directional voice and data communications including components for transmitting and receiving communications, such as a communications manager 820, an input/output (I/O) controller 810, a transceiver 815, an antenna 825, a memory 830, code 835, and a processor 840. These components may be in electronic communication or otherwise coupled (e.g., operatively, communicatively, functionally, electronically, electrically) via one or more buses (e.g., a bus 845) .
- buses
- the I/O controller 810 may manage input and output signals for the device 805.
- the I/O controller 810 may also manage peripherals not integrated into the device 805.
- the I/O controller 810 may represent a physical connection or port to an external peripheral.
- the I/O controller 810 may utilize an operating system such as or another known operating system.
- the I/O controller 810 may represent or interact with a modem, a keyboard, a mouse, a touchscreen, or a similar device.
- the I/O controller 810 may be implemented as part of a processor, such as the processor 840.
- a user may interact with the device 805 via the I/O controller 810 or via hardware components controlled by the I/O controller 810.
- the device 805 may include a single antenna 825. However, in some other cases, the device 805 may have more than one antenna 825, which may be capable of concurrently transmitting or receiving multiple wireless transmissions.
- the transceiver 815 may communicate bi-directionally, via the one or more antennas 825, wired, or wireless links as described herein.
- the transceiver 815 may represent a wireless transceiver and may communicate bi-directionally with another wireless transceiver.
- the transceiver 815 may also include a modem to modulate the packets, to provide the modulated packets to one or more antennas 825 for transmission, and to demodulate packets received from the one or more antennas 825.
- the transceiver 815 may be an example of a transmitter 515, a transmitter 615, a receiver 510, a receiver 610, or any combination thereof or component thereof, as described herein.
- the memory 830 may include RA memory (RAM) and read-only memory (ROM) .
- the memory 830 may store computer-readable, computer-executable code 835 including instructions that, when executed by the processor 840, cause the device 805 to perform various functions described herein.
- the code 835 may be stored in a non-transitory computer-readable medium such as system memory or another type of memory.
- the code 835 may not be directly executable by the processor 840 but may cause a computer (e.g., when compiled and executed) to perform functions described herein.
- the memory 830 may contain, among other things, a basic I/O system (BIOS) which may control basic hardware or software operation such as the interaction with peripheral components or devices.
- BIOS basic I/O system
- the processor 840 may include an intelligent hardware device (e.g., a general-purpose processor, a DSP, a CPU, a microcontroller, an ASIC, an FPGA, a programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic component, a discrete hardware component, or any combination thereof) .
- the processor 840 may be configured to operate a memory array using a memory controller.
- a memory controller may be integrated into the processor 840.
- the processor 840 may be configured to execute computer-readable instructions stored in a memory (e.g., the memory 830) to cause the device 805 to perform various functions (e.g., functions or tasks supporting mobility enhancements for RA procedures) .
- the device 805 or a component of the device 805 may include a processor 840 and memory 830 coupled with or to the processor 840, the processor 840 and memory 830 configured to perform various functions described herein.
- the communications manager 820 may support wireless communications at a UE in accordance with examples as disclosed herein.
- the communications manager 820 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity.
- the communications manager 820 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the communications manager 820 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from the first network entity, the downlink control information message.
- the communications manager 820 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for participating in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the downlink control information message, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
- the device 805 may support techniques for PDCCH-ordered RA procedure enhancements which may result in improved communication reliability, reduced latency, improved user experience related to reduced processing, reduced power consumption, more efficient utilization of communication resources, improved coordination between devices, longer battery life, and improved utilization of processing capability, among other advantages.
- the communications manager 820 may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, monitoring, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the transceiver 815, the one or more antennas 825, or any combination thereof.
- the communications manager 820 is illustrated as a separate component, in some examples, one or more functions described with reference to the communications manager 820 may be supported by or performed by the processor 840, the memory 830, the code 835, or any combination thereof.
- the code 835 may include instructions executable by the processor 840 to cause the device 805 to perform various aspects of mobility enhancements for RA procedures as described herein, or the processor 840 and the memory 830 may be otherwise configured to perform or support such operations.
- FIG. 9 shows a block diagram 900 of a device 905 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the device 905 may be an example of aspects of a network entity 105 as described herein.
- the device 905 may include a receiver 910, a transmitter 915, and a communications manager 920.
- the device 905 may also include a processor. Each of these components may be in communication with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) .
- the receiver 910 may provide a means for obtaining (e.g., receiving, determining, identifying) information such as user data, control information, or any combination thereof (e.g., I/Q samples, symbols, packets, protocol data units, service data units) associated with various channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels, channels associated with a protocol stack) .
- Information may be passed on to other components of the device 905.
- the receiver 910 may support obtaining information by receiving signals via one or more antennas. Additionally, or alternatively, the receiver 910 may support obtaining information by receiving signals via one or more wired (e.g., electrical, fiber optic) interfaces, wireless interfaces, or any combination thereof.
- the transmitter 915 may provide a means for outputting (e.g., transmitting, providing, conveying, sending) information generated by other components of the device 905.
- the transmitter 915 may output information such as user data, control information, or any combination thereof (e.g., I/Q samples, symbols, packets, protocol data units, service data units) associated with various channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels, channels associated with a protocol stack) .
- the transmitter 915 may support outputting information by transmitting signals via one or more antennas. Additionally, or alternatively, the transmitter 915 may support outputting information by transmitting signals via one or more wired (e.g., electrical, fiber optic) interfaces, wireless interfaces, or any combination thereof.
- the transmitter 915 and the receiver 910 may be co-located in a transceiver, which may include or be coupled with a modem.
- the communications manager 920, the receiver 910, the transmitter 915, or various combinations thereof or various components thereof may be examples of means for performing various aspects of mobility enhancements for RA procedures as described herein.
- the communications manager 920, the receiver 910, the transmitter 915, or various combinations or components thereof may support a method for performing one or more of the functions described herein.
- the communications manager 920, the receiver 910, the transmitter 915, or various combinations or components thereof may be implemented in hardware (e.g., in communications management circuitry) .
- the hardware may include a processor, a DSP, a CPU, an ASIC, an FPGA or other programmable logic device, a microcontroller, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof configured as or otherwise supporting a means for performing the functions described in the present disclosure.
- a processor and memory coupled with the processor may be configured to perform one or more of the functions described herein (e.g., by executing, by the processor, instructions stored in the memory) .
- the communications manager 920, the receiver 910, the transmitter 915, or various combinations or components thereof may be implemented in code (e.g., as communications management software or firmware) executed by a processor. If implemented in code executed by a processor, the functions of the communications manager 920, the receiver 910, the transmitter 915, or various combinations or components thereof may be performed by a general-purpose processor, a DSP, a CPU, an ASIC, an FPGA, a microcontroller, or any combination of these or other programmable logic devices (e.g., configured as or otherwise supporting a means for performing the functions described in the present disclosure) .
- code e.g., as communications management software or firmware
- the functions of the communications manager 920, the receiver 910, the transmitter 915, or various combinations or components thereof may be performed by a general-purpose processor, a DSP, a CPU, an ASIC, an FPGA, a microcontroller, or any combination of these or other programmable logic devices (e.g., configured as or otherwise supporting a
- the communications manager 920 may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, obtaining, monitoring, outputting, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the receiver 910, the transmitter 915, or both.
- the communications manager 920 may receive information from the receiver 910, send information to the transmitter 915, or be integrated in combination with the receiver 910, the transmitter 915, or both to obtain information, output information, or perform various other operations as described herein.
- the communications manager 920 may support wireless communications at a first network entity in accordance with examples as disclosed herein.
- the communications manager 920 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from a UE, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity.
- the communications manager 920 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting, responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the communications manager 920 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting the downlink control information message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
- the device 905 e.g., a processor controlling or otherwise coupled with the receiver 910, the transmitter 915, the communications manager 920, or a combination thereof
- the device 905 may support techniques for PDCCH-ordered RA procedure enhancements which may result in reduced processing, reduced power consumption, and more efficient utilization of communication resources, among other advantages.
- FIG. 10 shows a block diagram 1000 of a device 1005 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the device 1005 may be an example of aspects of a device 905 or a network entity 105 as described herein.
- the device 1005 may include a receiver 1010, a transmitter 1015, and a communications manager 1020.
- the device 1005 may also include a processor. Each of these components may be in communication with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) .
- the receiver 1010 may provide a means for obtaining (e.g., receiving, determining, identifying) information such as user data, control information, or any combination thereof (e.g., I/Q samples, symbols, packets, protocol data units, service data units) associated with various channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels, channels associated with a protocol stack) .
- Information may be passed on to other components of the device 1005.
- the receiver 1010 may support obtaining information by receiving signals via one or more antennas. Additionally, or alternatively, the receiver 1010 may support obtaining information by receiving signals via one or more wired (e.g., electrical, fiber optic) interfaces, wireless interfaces, or any combination thereof.
- the transmitter 1015 may provide a means for outputting (e.g., transmitting, providing, conveying, sending) information generated by other components of the device 1005.
- the transmitter 1015 may output information such as user data, control information, or any combination thereof (e.g., I/Q samples, symbols, packets, protocol data units, service data units) associated with various channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels, channels associated with a protocol stack) .
- the transmitter 1015 may support outputting information by transmitting signals via one or more antennas. Additionally, or alternatively, the transmitter 1015 may support outputting information by transmitting signals via one or more wired (e.g., electrical, fiber optic) interfaces, wireless interfaces, or any combination thereof.
- the transmitter 1015 and the receiver 1010 may be co-located in a transceiver, which may include or be coupled with a modem.
- the device 1005, or various components thereof, may be an example of means for performing various aspects of mobility enhancements for RA procedures as described herein.
- the communications manager 1020 may include a request component 1025, a resource configuration component 1030, a control information component 1035, or any combination thereof.
- the communications manager 1020 may be an example of aspects of a communications manager 920 as described herein.
- the communications manager 1020, or various components thereof, may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, obtaining, monitoring, outputting, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the receiver 1010, the transmitter 1015, or both.
- the communications manager 1020 may receive information from the receiver 1010, send information to the transmitter 1015, or be integrated in combination with the receiver 1010, the transmitter 1015, or both to obtain information, output information, or perform various other operations as described herein.
- the communications manager 1020 may support wireless communications at a first network entity in accordance with examples as disclosed herein.
- the request component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from a UE, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity.
- the resource configuration component 1030 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting, responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the control information component 1035 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting the downlink control information message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
- FIG. 11 shows a block diagram 1100 of a communications manager 1120 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the communications manager 1120 may be an example of aspects of a communications manager 920, a communications manager 1020, or both, as described herein.
- the communications manager 1120, or various components thereof, may be an example of means for performing various aspects of mobility enhancements for RA procedures as described herein.
- the communications manager 1120 may include a request component 1125, a resource configuration component 1130, a control information component 1135, a feedback component 1140, a RA procedure component 1145, or any combination thereof.
- Each of these components may communicate, directly or indirectly, with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) which may include communications within a protocol layer of a protocol stack, communications associated with a logical channel of a protocol stack (e.g., between protocol layers of a protocol stack, within a device, component, or virtualized component associated with a network entity 105, between devices, components, or virtualized components associated with a network entity 105) , or any combination thereof.
- the communications manager 1120 may support wireless communications at a first network entity in accordance with examples as disclosed herein.
- the request component 1125 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from a UE, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity.
- the resource configuration component 1130 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting, responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the control information component 1135 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting the downlink control information message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
- the request component 1125 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting, to the second network entity, a second request for the second network entity to perform the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure with the UE based on receiving the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the first request from the UE.
- the feedback component 1140 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, responsive to the second request, an acknowledgment message indicative of the set of uplink resources and the set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the set of uplink resources includes at least one uplink bandwidth part associated with the second network entity and one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure. In some examples, the set of downlink resources includes at least one downlink bandwidth part associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part and one or more downlink reference signals associated with the one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the first set of control messages are further indicative of parameters associated with one or more uplink channels associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part, one or more reference numerologies, one or more preamble formats, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part, one or more repetition patterns associated with an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, one or more frequency hopping patterns associated with the initial message, one or more beam switch patterns associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of repetitions of the initial message, a threshold quantity of frequency hops associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of beam switches associated with the initial message, a set of uplink data resource or uplink control resources associated with the second network entity for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity, one or more downlink channels associated with the at least one downlink bandwidth part, one or more control resource sets, one or more search space sets, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one downlink bandwidth part, or
- the at least one downlink bandwidth part is associated with the first network entity
- the RA procedure component 1145 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting a timing advance command or a RA response of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure associated with the second network entity, where a downlink control channel used to receive the timing advance command or a downlink control channel used to receive the RA response is quasi-co-located with a downlink control channel used to receive a the downlink control information message.
- the feedback component 1140 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, responsive to the RA response, a feedback message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure according to a spatial filter, where the spatial filter is associated with a transmission configuration indicator state further associated with the downlink control channel used to receive the downlink control information message, the downlink control channel used to receive the timing advance command, or the downlink control channel used to receive the RA response.
- the first set of control messages include one or more system information messages, one or more radio resource control messages, one or more medium access control-control element messages, one or more second downlink control information messages, or any combination thereof.
- the downlink control information message is indicative of an identifier associated with the second network entity, an identifier associated with an uplink bandwidth part further associated with the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, or both.
- the first set of control messages are indicative of one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the downlink control information message is indicative of a coverage enhancement scheme from the one or more coverage enhancement schemes selected for an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the one or more coverage enhancement schemes indicated by the first set of control messages are indicative of a first coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure in a time domain, a second coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of the initial message in a frequency domain, a third coverage enhancement scheme associated with frequency hopping of the initial message, a fourth coverage enhancement scheme associated with switching a transmission beam associated with the initial message, or any combination thereof.
- the first set of control messages are further indicative of a quantity of repetitions associated with the first coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of repetitions associated with the second coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of frequency hops associated with the third coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of beam switches associated with the fourth coverage enhancement scheme, an index associated with a pattern further associated with a coverage enhancement scheme of the one or more coverage enhancement schemes, oy any combination thereof.
- the downlink control information message is indicative of an activation of a set of uplink data resources or uplink control resources for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity or is indicative of whether the UE may retransmit an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure prior to expiration of a timer.
- a control message of the first set of control messages includes an indication of the timer.
- initiation of the timer is based on the UE receiving a last symbol of a the downlink control information message.
- the RA procedure component 1145 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure based on the first set of control messages, where a first duration between reception of a last symbol of the downlink control information message and transmission of a first symbol of the initial message satisfies one or more thresholds.
- the first duration exceeds a first threshold of the one or more thresholds and fails to exceed a second threshold of the one or more thresholds.
- the first threshold is based on a capability of the UE, a coverage enhancement scheme indicated to the UE, a duration associated with switching a bandwidth part, a carrier frequency, a frequency range and a subcarrier spacing between the first network entity and the second network entity, a processing delay, a cell re-selection delay, a transmit chain switching mode of the UE, or any combination thereof.
- the second threshold is based on a validity period associated with the downlink control information message.
- FIG. 12 shows a diagram of a system 1200 including a device 1205 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
- the device 1205 may be an example of or include the components of a device 905, a device 1005, or a network entity 105 as described herein.
- the device 1205 may communicate with one or more network entities 105, one or more UEs 115, or any combination thereof, which may include communications over one or more wired interfaces, over one or more wireless interfaces, or any combination thereof.
- the device 1205 may include components that support outputting and obtaining communications, such as a communications manager 1220, a transceiver 1210, an antenna 1215, a memory 1225, code 1230, and a processor 1235. These components may be in electronic communication or otherwise coupled (e.g., operatively, communicatively, functionally, electronically, electrically) via one or more buses (e.g., a bus 1240) .
- buses e.g.
- the transceiver 1210 may support bi-directional communications via wired links, wireless links, or both as described herein.
- the transceiver 1210 may include a wired transceiver and may communicate bi-directionally with another wired transceiver. Additionally, or alternatively, in some examples, the transceiver 1210 may include a wireless transceiver and may communicate bi-directionally with another wireless transceiver.
- the device 1205 may include one or more antennas 1215, which may be capable of transmitting or receiving wireless transmissions (e.g., concurrently) .
- the transceiver 1210 may also include a modem to modulate signals, to provide the modulated signals for transmission (e.g., by one or more antennas 1215, by a wired transmitter) , to receive modulated signals (e.g., from one or more antennas 1215, from a wired receiver) , and to demodulate signals.
- the transceiver 1210 may include one or more interfaces, such as one or more interfaces coupled with the one or more antennas 1215 that are configured to support various receiving or obtaining operations, or one or more interfaces coupled with the one or more antennas 1215 that are configured to support various transmitting or outputting operations, or a combination thereof.
- the transceiver 1210 may include or be configured for coupling with one or more processors or memory components that are operable to perform or support operations based on received or obtained information or signals, or to generate information or other signals for transmission or other outputting, or any combination thereof.
- the transceiver 1210, or the transceiver 1210 and the one or more antennas 1215, or the transceiver 1210 and the one or more antennas 1215 and one or more processors or memory components may be included in a chip or chip assembly that is installed in the device 1205.
- the transceiver may be operable to support communications via one or more communications links (e.g., a communication link 125, a backhaul communication link 120, a midhaul communication link 162, a fronthaul communication link 168) .
- one or more communications links e.g., a communication link 125, a backhaul communication link 120, a midhaul communication link 162, a fronthaul communication link 168 .
- the memory 1225 may include RAM and ROM.
- the memory 1225 may store computer-readable, computer-executable code 1230 including instructions that, when executed by the processor 1235, cause the device 1205 to perform various functions described herein.
- the code 1230 may be stored in a non-transitory computer-readable medium such as system memory or another type of memory.
- the code 1230 may not be directly executable by the processor 1235 but may cause a computer (e.g., when compiled and executed) to perform functions described herein.
- the memory 1225 may contain, among other things, a BIOS which may control basic hardware or software operation such as the interaction with peripheral components or devices.
- the processor 1235 may include an intelligent hardware device (e.g., a general-purpose processor, a DSP, an ASIC, a CPU, an FPGA, a microcontroller, a programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic, a discrete hardware component, or any combination thereof) .
- the processor 1235 may be configured to operate a memory array using a memory controller.
- a memory controller may be integrated into the processor 1235.
- the processor 1235 may be configured to execute computer-readable instructions stored in a memory (e.g., the memory 1225) to cause the device 1205 to perform various functions (e.g., functions or tasks supporting mobility enhancements for RA procedures) .
- the device 1205 or a component of the device 1205 may include a processor 1235 and memory 1225 coupled with the processor 1235, the processor 1235 and memory 1225 configured to perform various functions described herein.
- the processor 1235 may be an example of a cloud-computing platform (e.g., one or more physical nodes and supporting software such as operating systems, virtual machines, or container instances) that may host the functions (e.g., by executing code 1230) to perform the functions of the device 1205.
- the processor 1235 may be any one or more suitable processors capable of executing scripts or instructions of one or more software programs stored in the device 1205 (such as within the memory 1225) .
- the processor 1235 may be a component of a processing system.
- a processing system may generally refer to a system or series of machines or components that receives inputs and processes the inputs to produce a set of outputs (which may be passed to other systems or components of, for example, the device 1205) .
- a processing system of the device 1205 may refer to a system including the various other components or subcomponents of the device 1205, such as the processor 1235, or the transceiver 1210, or the communications manager 1220, or other components or combinations of components of the device 1205.
- the processing system of the device 1205 may interface with other components of the device 1205, and may process information received from other components (such as inputs or signals) or output information to other components.
- a chip or modem of the device 1205 may include a processing system and one or more interfaces to output information, or to obtain information, or both.
- the one or more interfaces may be implemented as or otherwise include a first interface configured to output information and a second interface configured to obtain information, or a same interface configured to output information and to obtain information, among other implementations.
- the one or more interfaces may refer to an interface between the processing system of the chip or modem and a transmitter, such that the device 1205 may transmit information output from the chip or modem.
- the one or more interfaces may refer to an interface between the processing system of the chip or modem and a receiver, such that the device 1205 may obtain information or signal inputs, and the information may be passed to the processing system.
- a first interface also may obtain information or signal inputs
- a second interface also may output information or signal outputs.
- a bus 1240 may support communications of (e.g., within) a protocol layer of a protocol stack.
- a bus 1240 may support communications associated with a logical channel of a protocol stack (e.g., between protocol layers of a protocol stack) , which may include communications performed within a component of the device 1205, or between different components of the device 1205 that may be co-located or located in different locations (e.g., where the device 1205 may refer to a system in which one or more of the communications manager 1220, the transceiver 1210, the memory 1225, the code 1230, and the processor 1235 may be located in one of the different components or divided between different components) .
- the communications manager 1220 may manage aspects of communications with a core network 130 (e.g., via one or more wired or wireless backhaul links) .
- the communications manager 1220 may manage the transfer of data communications for client devices, such as one or more UEs 115.
- the communications manager 1220 may manage communications with other network entities 105, and may include a controller or scheduler for controlling communications with UEs 115 in cooperation with other network entities 105.
- the communications manager 1220 may support an X2 interface within an LTE/LTE-A wireless communications network technology to provide communication between network entities 105.
- the communications manager 1220 may support wireless communications at a first network entity in accordance with examples as disclosed herein.
- the communications manager 1220 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from a UE, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity.
- the communications manager 1220 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting, responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the communications manager 1220 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting the downlink control information message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
- the device 1205 may support techniques for PDCCH-ordered RA procedure enhancements which may result in improved communication reliability, reduced latency, improved user experience related to reduced processing, reduced power consumption, more efficient utilization of communication resources, improved coordination between devices, longer battery life, and improved utilization of processing capability, among other advantages.
- the communications manager 1220 may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, obtaining, monitoring, outputting, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the transceiver 1210, the one or more antennas 1215 (e.g., where applicable) , or any combination thereof.
- the communications manager 1220 is illustrated as a separate component, in some examples, one or more functions described with reference to the communications manager 1220 may be supported by or performed by the transceiver 1210, the processor 1235, the memory 1225, the code 1230, or any combination thereof.
- the code 1230 may include instructions executable by the processor 1235 to cause the device 1205 to perform various aspects of mobility enhancements for RA procedures as described herein, or the processor 1235 and the memory 1225 may be otherwise configured to perform or support such operations.
- FIG. 13 shows a flowchart illustrating a method 1300 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure.
- the operations of the method 1300 may be implemented by a UE or its components as described herein.
- the operations of the method 1300 may be performed by a UE 115 as described with reference to FIGs. 1 through 8.
- a UE may execute a set of instructions to control the functional elements of the wireless UE to perform the described functions.
- the wireless UE may perform aspects of the described functions using special-purpose hardware.
- the method may include transmitting, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity.
- the operations of 1305 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1305 may be performed by a request component 725 as described with reference to FIG. 7.
- the method may include receiving, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the operations of 1310 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1310 may be performed by a configuration component 730 as described with reference to FIG. 7.
- the method may include receiving, from the first network entity, the downlink control information message.
- the operations of 1315 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1315 may be performed by a RA procedure component 735 as described with reference to FIG. 7.
- the method may include participating in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the downlink control information message, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
- the operations of 1320 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1320 may be performed by a RA procedure component 735 as described with reference to FIG. 7.
- FIG. 14 shows a flowchart illustrating a method 1400 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure.
- the operations of the method 1400 may be implemented by a UE or its components as described herein.
- the operations of the method 1400 may be performed by a UE 115 as described with reference to FIGs. 1 through 8.
- a UE may execute a set of instructions to control the functional elements of the wireless UE to perform the described functions.
- the wireless UE may perform aspects of the described functions using special-purpose hardware.
- the method may include transmitting, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity.
- the operations of 1405 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1405 may be performed by a request component 725 as described with reference to FIG. 7.
- the method may include receiving, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the operations of 1410 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1410 may be performed by a configuration component 730 as described with reference to FIG. 7.
- the method may include receiving, from the first network entity, the downlink control information message.
- the operations of 1415 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1415 may be performed by a RA procedure component 735 as described with reference to FIG. 7.
- the method may include participating in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the downlink control information message, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
- the operations of 1420 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1420 may be performed by a RA procedure component 735 as described with reference to FIG. 7.
- FIG. 15 shows a flowchart illustrating a method 1500 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure.
- the operations of the method 1500 may be implemented by a network entity or its components as described herein.
- the operations of the method 1500 may be performed by a network entity as described with reference to FIGs. 1 through 4 and 9 through 12.
- a network entity may execute a set of instructions to control the functional elements of the wireless network entity to perform the described functions.
- the wireless network entity may perform aspects of the described functions using special-purpose hardware.
- the method may include receiving, from a UE, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity.
- the operations of 1505 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1505 may be performed by a request component 1125 as described with reference to FIG. 11.
- the method may include transmitting, responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the operations of 1510 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1510 may be performed by a resource configuration component 1130 as described with reference to FIG. 11.
- the method may include transmitting the downlink control information message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
- the operations of 1515 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1515 may be performed by a control information component 1135 as described with reference to FIG. 11.
- FIG. 16 shows a flowchart illustrating a method 1600 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure.
- the operations of the method 1600 may be implemented by a network entity or its components as described herein.
- the operations of the method 1600 may be performed by a network entity as described with reference to FIGs. 1 through 4 and 9 through 12.
- a network entity may execute a set of instructions to control the functional elements of the wireless network entity to perform the described functions.
- the wireless network entity may perform aspects of the described functions using special-purpose hardware.
- the method may include receiving, from a UE, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity.
- the operations of 1605 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1605 may be performed by a request component 1125 as described with reference to FIG. 11.
- the method may include transmitting, responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- the operations of 1610 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1610 may be performed by a resource configuration component 1130 as described with reference to FIG. 11.
- the method may include transmitting the downlink control information message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
- the operations of 1615 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1615 may be performed by a control information component 1135 as described with reference to FIG. 11.
- a method for wireless communications at a UE comprising: transmitting, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UAI, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, wherein the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity; receiving, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UAI, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure; receiving, from the first network entity, the DCI message; and participating in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the DCI message, wherein at least a portion of the RA communications are based at least in part on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
- Aspect 2 The method of aspect 1, further comprising: obtaining a TA associated with the second network entity based at least in part on performing a portion of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages, wherein the set of uplink resources, the set of downlink resources, or both, are associated with the first network entity, the second network entity, or both.
- Aspect 3 The method of any of aspects 1 through 2, wherein the set of uplink resources comprises at least one uplink BWP associated with the second network entity and one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, and the set of downlink resources comprises at least one downlink BWP associated with the at least one uplink BWP and one or more downlink reference signals associated with the one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- Aspect 4 The method of aspect 3, wherein the first set of control messages are further indicative of parameters associated with one or more uplink channels associated with the at least one uplink BWP, one or more reference numerologies, one or more preamble formats, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one uplink BWP, one or more repetition patterns associated with an initial message of the RA communications, one or more frequency hopping patterns associated with the initial message, one or more beam switch patterns associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of repetitions of the initial message, a threshold quantity of frequency hops associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of beam switches associated with the initial message, a set of uplink data resource or uplink control resources associated with the second network entity for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity, one or more downlink channels associated with the at least one downlink BWP, one or more control resource sets, one or more search space sets, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one downlink BW
- Aspect 5 The method of any of aspects 3 through 4, wherein the at least one downlink BWP is associated with the second network entity, and wherein participating in the RA communications comprises: receiving a downlink reference signal associated with an initial message of the RA communications and a RAR of the RA communications, wherein the RAR is QCL’ed with the downlink reference signal or one or more reference signals indicated via the DCI message.
- Aspect 6 The method of aspect 5, wherein participating in the RA communications comprises: transmitting, to the second network entity and responsive to the RAR, a feedback message of the RA communications in accordance with one or more spatial filters, wherein at least one of the one or more spatial filters is associated with a beam switch pattern of the initial message of the RA communications.
- Aspect 7 The method of any of aspects 3 through 4, wherein the at least one downlink BWP is associated with the first network entity, and wherein participating in the RA communications comprises: receiving a TA command or a RAR of the RA communications associated with the second network entity, wherein a downlink control channel used to receive the TA command or a downlink control channel used to receive the RAR is QCL’ed with a downlink control channel used to receive the DCI message.
- Aspect 8 The method of aspect 7, wherein participating in the RA communications comprises: transmitting, to the first network entity and responsive to the RAR, a feedback message of the RA communications according to a spatial filter, wherein the spatial filter is associated with a TCI state further associated with the downlink control channel used to receive the DCI message, the downlink control channel used to receive the TA command, or the downlink control channel used to receive the RAR.
- Aspect 9 The method of any of aspects 1 through 8, wherein the first set of control messages comprise one or more SI messages, one or more RRC messages, one or more MAC-CE messages, one or more second DCI messages, or any combination thereof.
- Aspect 10 The method of any of aspects 1 through 9, further comprising: receiving, from the second network entity, a second set of control messages that are indicative of one or more parameters associated with the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- Aspect 11 The method of any of aspects 1 through 10, wherein the DCI message is indicative of an identifier associated with the second network entity, an identifier associated with an uplink BWP further associated with the RA communications, or both.
- Aspect 12 The method of any of aspects 1 through 11, wherein the first set of control messages are indicative of one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the RA communications, and the DCI message is indicative of a coverage enhancement scheme from the one or more coverage enhancement schemes selected for an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- Aspect 13 The method of aspect 12, wherein the one or more coverage enhancement schemes indicated by the first set of control messages are indicative of a first coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of an initial message of the RA communications in a time domain, a second coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of the initial message in a frequency domain, a third coverage enhancement scheme associated with frequency hopping of the initial message, a fourth coverage enhancement scheme associated with switching a transmission beam associated with the initial message, or any combination thereof.
- Aspect 14 The method of aspect 13, wherein the first set of control messages are further indicative of a quantity of repetitions associated with the first coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of repetitions associated with the second coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of frequency hops associated with the third coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of beam switches associated with the fourth coverage enhancement scheme, an index associated with a pattern further associated with a coverage enhancement scheme of the one or more coverage enhancement schemes, oy any combination thereof.
- Aspect 15 The method of any of aspects 1 through 14, wherein the DCI message is indicative of an activation of a set of uplink data resources or uplink control resources for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity or is indicative of whether the UE may retransmit an initial message of the RA communications prior to expiration of a timer, a control message of the first set of control messages comprises an indication of the timer, and the UE initiates the timer based at least in part on receiving a last symbol of the DCI message.
- Aspect 16 The method of any of aspects 1 through 15, wherein participating in the RA communications comprises: transmitting an initial message of the RA communications based at least in part on the first set of control messages, wherein a first duration between reception of a last symbol of the DCI message and transmission of a first symbol of the initial message satisfies one or more thresholds.
- Aspect 17 The method of aspect 16, wherein participating in the RA communications comprises: transmitting a retransmission of the initial message of the RA communications based at least in part on transmitting the initial message, wherein a second duration between reception of the last symbol of the DCI message and transmission of a first symbol of the retransmission satisfies the one or more thresholds.
- Aspect 18 The method of any of aspects 16 through 17, wherein the first duration exceeds a first threshold of the one or more thresholds and fails to exceed a second threshold of the one or more thresholds.
- Aspect 19 The method of aspect 18, wherein the first threshold is based at least in part on a capability of the UE, a coverage enhancement scheme indicated to the UE, a duration associated with switching a BWP, a carrier frequency, a frequency range and a SCI between the first network entity and the second network entity, a processing delay, a cell re-selection delay, a transmit chain switching mode of the UE, or any combination thereof.
- Aspect 20 The method of any of aspects 18 through 19, wherein the second threshold is based at least in part on a validity period associated with the DCI message.
- a method for wireless communications at a first network entity comprising: receiving, from a UE, a measurement report, UAI, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, wherein the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity; transmitting, responsive to the measurement report, the UAI, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure; and transmitting the DCI message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
- Aspect 22 The method of aspect 21, further comprising: transmitting, to the second network entity, a second request for the second network entity to perform the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure with the UE based at least in part on receiving the measurement report, the UAI, or the first request from the UE; and receiving, responsive to the second request, an acknowledgment message indicative of the set of uplink resources and the set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- Aspect 23 The method of any of aspects 21 through 22, wherein the set of uplink resources comprises at least one uplink BWP associated with the second network entity and one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, and the set of downlink resources comprises at least one downlink BWP associated with the at least one uplink BWP and one or more downlink reference signals associated with the one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- Aspect 24 The method of aspect 23, wherein the first set of control messages are further indicative of parameters associated with one or more uplink channels associated with the at least one uplink BWP, one or more reference numerologies, one or more preamble formats, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one uplink BWP, one or more repetition patterns associated with an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, one or more frequency hopping patterns associated with the initial message, one or more beam switch patterns associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of repetitions of the initial message, a threshold quantity of frequency hops associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of beam switches associated with the initial message, a set of uplink data resource or uplink control resources associated with the second network entity for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity, one or more downlink channels associated with the at least one downlink BWP, one or more control resource sets, one or more search space sets, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with
- Aspect 25 The method of any of aspects 23 through 24, wherein the at least one downlink BWP is associated with the first network entity, the method further comprising: transmitting a TA command or a RAR of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure associated with the second network entity, wherein a downlink control channel used to receive the TA command or a downlink control channel used to receive the RAR is QCL’ed with a downlink control channel used to receive the DCI message.
- Aspect 26 The method of aspect 25, further comprising: receiving, responsive to the RAR, a feedback message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure according to a spatial filter, wherein the spatial filter is associated with a TCI state further associated with the downlink control channel used to receive the DCI message, the downlink control channel used to receive the TA command, or the downlink control channel used to receive the RAR.
- Aspect 27 The method of any of aspects 21 through 26, wherein the first set of control messages comprise one or more SI messages, one or more RRC messages, one or more MAC-CE messages, one or more second DCI messages, or any combination thereof.
- Aspect 28 The method of any of aspects 21 through 27, wherein the DCI message is indicative of an identifier associated with the second network entity, an identifier associated with an uplink BWP further associated with the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, or both.
- Aspect 29 The method of any of aspects 21 through 28, wherein the first set of control messages are indicative of one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, and the DCI message is indicative of a coverage enhancement scheme from the one or more coverage enhancement schemes selected for an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
- Aspect 30 The method of aspect 29, wherein the one or more coverage enhancement schemes indicated by the first set of control messages are indicative of a first coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure in a time domain, a second coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of the initial message in a frequency domain, a third coverage enhancement scheme associated with frequency hopping of the initial message, a fourth coverage enhancement scheme associated with switching a transmission beam associated with the initial message, or any combination thereof.
- Aspect 31 The method of aspect 30, wherein the first set of control messages are further indicative of a quantity of repetitions associated with the first coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of repetitions associated with the second coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of frequency hops associated with the third coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of beam switches associated with the fourth coverage enhancement scheme, an index associated with a pattern further associated with a coverage enhancement scheme of the one or more coverage enhancement schemes, oy any combination thereof.
- Aspect 32 The method of any of aspects 21 through 31, wherein the DCI message is indicative of an activation of a set of uplink data resources or uplink control resources for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity or is indicative of whether the UE may retransmit an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure prior to expiration of a timer, a control message of the first set of control messages comprises an indication of the timer, and initiation of the timer is based at least in part on the UE receiving a last symbol of the DCI message.
- Aspect 33 The method of any of aspects 21 through 32, further comprising: receiving an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure based at least in part on the first set of control messages, wherein a first duration between reception of a last symbol of the DCI message and transmission of a first symbol of the initial message satisfies one or more thresholds.
- Aspect 34 The method of aspect 33, wherein the first duration exceeds a first threshold of the one or more thresholds and fails to exceed a second threshold of the one or more thresholds.
- Aspect 35 The method of aspect 34, wherein the first threshold is based at least in part on a capability of the UE, a coverage enhancement scheme indicated to the UE, a duration associated with switching a BWP, a carrier frequency, a frequency range and a SCI between the first network entity and the second network entity, a processing delay, a cell re-selection delay, a transmit chain switching mode of the UE, or any combination thereof.
- Aspect 36 The method of any of aspects 34 through 35, wherein the second threshold is based at least in part on a validity period associated with the DCI message.
- Aspect 37 An apparatus for wireless communications at a UE, comprising a processor; memory coupled with the processor; and instructions stored in the memory and executable by the processor to cause the apparatus to perform a method of any of aspects 1 through 20.
- Aspect 38 An apparatus for wireless communications at a UE, comprising at least one means for performing a method of any of aspects 1 through 20.
- Aspect 39 A non-transitory computer-readable medium storing code for wireless communications at a UE, the code comprising instructions executable by a processor to perform a method of any of aspects 1 through 20.
- Aspect 40 An apparatus for wireless communications at a first network entity, comprising a processor; memory coupled with the processor; and instructions stored in the memory and executable by the processor to cause the apparatus to perform a method of any of aspects 21 through 36.
- Aspect 41 An apparatus for wireless communications at a first network entity, comprising at least one means for performing a method of any of aspects 21 through 36.
- Aspect 42 A non-transitory computer-readable medium storing code for wireless communications at a first network entity, the code comprising instructions executable by a processor to perform a method of any of aspects 21 through 36.
- LTE, LTE-A, LTE-A Pro, or NR may be described for purposes of example, and LTE, LTE-A, LTE-A Pro, or NR terminology may be used in much of the description, the techniques described herein are applicable beyond LTE, LTE-A, LTE-A Pro, or NR networks.
- the described techniques may be applicable to various other wireless communications systems such as Ultra Mobile Broadband (UMB) , Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.11 (Wi-Fi) , IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX) , IEEE 802.20, Flash-OFDM, as well as other systems and radio technologies not explicitly mentioned herein.
- UMB Ultra Mobile Broadband
- IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
- Wi-Fi Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
- WiMAX IEEE 802.16
- IEEE 802.20 Flash-OFDM
- Information and signals described herein may be represented using any of a variety of different technologies and techniques.
- data, instructions, commands, information, signals, bits, symbols, and chips that may be referenced throughout the description may be represented by voltages, currents, electromagnetic waves, magnetic fields or particles, optical fields or particles, or any combination thereof.
- a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor but, in the alternative, the processor may be any processor, controller, microcontroller, or state machine.
- a processor may also be implemented as a combination of computing devices (e.g., a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, multiple microprocessors, one or more microprocessors in conjunction with a DSP core, or any other such configuration) .
- the functions described herein may be implemented using hardware, software executed by a processor, firmware, or any combination thereof. If implemented using software executed by a processor, the functions may be stored as or transmitted using one or more instructions or code of a computer-readable medium. Other examples and implementations are within the scope of the disclosure and appended claims. For example, due to the nature of software, functions described herein may be implemented using software executed by a processor, hardware, firmware, hardwiring, or combinations of any of these. Features implementing functions may also be physically located at various positions, including being distributed such that portions of functions are implemented at different physical locations.
- Computer-readable media includes both non-transitory computer storage media and communication media including any medium that facilitates transfer of a computer program from one location to another.
- a non-transitory storage medium may be any available medium that may be accessed by a general-purpose or special-purpose computer.
- non-transitory computer-readable media may include RAM, ROM, electrically erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM) , flash memory, compact disk (CD) ROM or other optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, or any other non-transitory medium that may be used to carry or store desired program code means in the form of instructions or data structures and that may be accessed by a general-purpose or special-purpose computer, or a general-purpose or special-purpose processor.
- any connection is properly termed a computer-readable medium.
- the software is transmitted from a website, server, or other remote source using a coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, digital subscriber line (DSL) , or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave
- the coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, DSL, or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave are included in the definition of computer-readable medium.
- Disk and disc include CD, laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc (DVD) , floppy disk and Blu-ray disc. Disks may reproduce data magnetically, and discs may reproduce data optically using lasers. Combinations of the above are also included within the scope of computer-readable media.
- determining encompasses a variety of actions and, therefore, “determining” can include calculating, computing, processing, deriving, investigating, looking up (such as via looking up in a table, a database or another data structure) , ascertaining and the like. Also, “determining” can include receiving (e.g., receiving information) , accessing (e.g., accessing data stored in memory) and the like. Also, “determining” can include resolving, obtaining, selecting, choosing, establishing, and other such similar actions.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Methods, systems, and devices for wireless communications are described. Some wireless communications systems may support enhancements to physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) -ordered random access (RA) procedures. For example, a user equipment (UE) may transmit, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a request for a PDCCH-ordered RA procedure, wherein the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information (DCI) message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit an RA message to a second network entity. The UE may receive a first set of control messages indicating a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure and may participate in RA communications with the second network entity, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources.
Description
FIELD OF TECHNOLOGY
The following relates to wireless communications, including mobility enhancements for random access (RA) procedures.
Wireless communications systems are widely deployed to provide various types of communication content such as voice, video, packet data, messaging, broadcast, and so on. These systems may be capable of supporting communication with multiple users by sharing the available system resources (e.g., time, frequency, and power) . Examples of such multiple-access systems include fourth generation (4G) systems such as Long Term Evolution (LTE) systems, LTE-Advanced (LTE-A) systems, or LTE-A Pro systems, and fifth generation (5G) systems which may be referred to as New Radio (NR) systems. These systems may employ technologies such as code division multiple access (CDMA) , time division multiple access (TDMA) , frequency division multiple access (FDMA) , orthogonal FDMA (OFDMA) , or discrete Fourier transform spread orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (DFT-S-OFDM) . A wireless multiple-access communications system may include one or more base stations, each supporting wireless communication for communication devices, which may be known as user equipment (UE) .
SUMMARY
The described techniques relate to improved methods, systems, devices, and apparatuses that support mobility enhancements for random access (RA) procedures. Generally, the techniques described herein may enable enhancements to physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) -ordered RA procedures to improve reliability and resource utilization. For example, a user equipment (UE) may transmit, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UE assistance information (UAI) , or a first request for a PDCCH-ordered RA procedure, wherein the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information (DCI) message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit an RA message to a second network entity. As such, the first network entity may transmit, to the second network entity, a second
request for the second network entity to perform the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure with the UE based on receiving the measurement report, the UAI, or the first request, from the UE. The second network entity may transmit, responsive to the second request, an acknowledgment message indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure. The UE may receive, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the first request, a first set of control messages indicating a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure. Additionally, the UE may receive, from the first network entity, the DCI message and may participate in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the DCI message, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
A method for wireless communications at a user equipment (UE) is described. The method may include transmitting, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UAI, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity, receiving, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UAI, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, receiving, from the first network entity, the DCI message, and participating in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the DCI message, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
An apparatus for wireless communications at a UE is described. The apparatus may include a processor, memory coupled with the processor, and instructions stored in the memory. The instructions may be executable by the processor to cause the apparatus to transmit, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UAI, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message from the first network
entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity, receive, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UAI, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, receive, from the first network entity, the DCI message, and participate in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the DCI message, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
Another apparatus for wireless communications at a UE is described. The apparatus may include means for transmitting, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UAI, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity, means for receiving, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UAI, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, means for receiving, from the first network entity, the DCI message, and means for participating in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the DCI message, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
A non-transitory computer-readable medium storing code for wireless communications at a UE is described. The code may include instructions executable by a processor to transmit, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UAI, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity, receive, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UAI, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, receive, from the first network entity, the DCI message, and participate in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the DCI message,
where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
Some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein may further include operations, features, means, or instructions for obtaining a TA associated with the second network entity based on performing a portion of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages, where the set of uplink resources, the set of downlink resources, or both, may be associated with the first network entity, the second network entity, or both.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the set of uplink resources includes at least one uplink BWP associated with the second network entity and one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure and the set of downlink resources includes at least one downlink BWP associated with the at least one uplink BWP and one or more downlink reference signals associated with the one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the first set of control messages may be further indicative of parameters associated with one or more uplink channels associated with the at least one uplink BWP, one or more reference numerologies, one or more preamble formats, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one uplink BWP, one or more repetition patterns associated with an initial message of the RA communications, one or more frequency hopping patterns associated with the initial message, one or more beam switch patterns associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of repetitions of the initial message, a threshold quantity of frequency hops associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of beam switches associated with the initial message, a set of uplink data resource or uplink control resources associated with the second network entity for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity, one or more downlink channels associated with the at least one downlink BWP, one or more control resource sets, one or more search space sets, one or more reference
signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one downlink BWP, or any combination thereof.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, participating in the RA communications may include operations, features, means, or instructions for receiving a downlink reference signal associated with an initial message of the RA communications and a RAR of the RA communications, where the RAR may be QCL’ed with the downlink reference signal or one or more reference signals indicated via the DCI message.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, participating in the RA communications may include operations, features, means, or instructions for transmitting, to the second network entity and responsive to the RAR, a feedback message of the RA communications in accordance with one or more spatial filters, where at least one of the one or more spatial filters may be associated with a beam switch pattern of the initial message of the RA communications.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, participating in the RA communications may include operations, features, means, or instructions for receiving a TA command or a RAR of the RA communications associated with the second network entity, where a downlink control channel used to receive the TA command or a downlink control channel used to receive the RAR may be QCL’ed with a downlink control channel used to receive the DCI message.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, participating in the RA communications may include operations, features, means, or instructions for transmitting, to the first network entity and responsive to the RAR, a feedback message of the RA communications according to a spatial filter, where the spatial filter may be associated with a TCI state further associated with the downlink control channel used to receive the DCI message, the downlink control channel used to receive the TA command, or the downlink control channel used to receive the RAR.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the first set of control messages include one or more SI messages, one or more RRC messages, one or more MAC-CE messages, one or more second DCI messages, or any combination thereof.
Some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein may further include operations, features, means, or instructions for receiving, from the second network entity, a second set of control messages that may be indicative of one or more parameters associated with the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the DCI message may be indicative of an identifier associated with the second network entity, an identifier associated with an uplink BWP further associated with the RA communications, or both.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the first set of control messages may be indicative of one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the RA communications and the DCI message may be indicative of a coverage enhancement scheme from the one or more coverage enhancement schemes selected for an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the one or more coverage enhancement schemes indicated by the first set of control messages may be indicative of a first coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of an initial message of the RA communications in a time domain, a second coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of the initial message in a frequency domain, a third coverage enhancement scheme associated with frequency hopping of the initial message, a fourth coverage enhancement scheme associated with switching a transmission beam associated with the initial message, or any combination thereof.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the first set of control messages may be further indicative of a quantity of repetitions associated with the first coverage enhancement
scheme, a quantity of repetitions associated with the second coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of frequency hops associated with the third coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of beam switches associated with the fourth coverage enhancement scheme, an index associated with a pattern further associated with a coverage enhancement scheme of the one or more coverage enhancement schemes, oy any combination thereof.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the DCI message may be indicative of an activation of a set of uplink data resources or uplink control resources for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity or may be indicative of whether the UE may retransmit an initial message of the RA communications prior to expiration of a timer, a control message of the first set of control messages includes an indication of the timer, and the UE initiates the timer based on receiving a last symbol of the DCI message.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, participating in the RA communications may include operations, features, means, or instructions for transmitting an initial message of the RA communications based on the first set of control messages, where a first duration between reception of a last symbol of the DCI message and transmission of a first symbol of the initial message satisfies one or more thresholds.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, participating in the RA communications may include operations, features, means, or instructions for transmitting a retransmission of the initial message of the RA communications based on transmitting the initial message, where a second duration between reception of the last symbol of the DCI message and transmission of a first symbol of the retransmission satisfies the one or more thresholds.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the first duration exceeds a first threshold of the one or more thresholds and fails to exceed a second threshold of the one or more thresholds.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the first threshold may be based on a capability of
the UE, a coverage enhancement scheme indicated to the UE, a duration associated with switching a BWP, a carrier frequency, a frequency range and a SCI between the first network entity and the second network entity, a processing delay, a cell re-selection delay, a transmit chain switching mode of the UE, or any combination thereof.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the second threshold may be based on a validity period associated with the DCI message.
A method for wireless communications at a first network entity is described. The method may include receiving, from a UE, a measurement report, UAI, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity, transmitting, responsive to the measurement report, the UAI, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, and transmitting the DCI message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
An apparatus for wireless communications at a first network entity is described. The apparatus may include a processor, memory coupled with the processor, and instructions stored in the memory. The instructions may be executable by the processor to cause the apparatus to receive, from a UE, a measurement report, UAI, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity, transmit, responsive to the measurement report, the UAI, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, and transmit the DCI message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
Another apparatus for wireless communications at a first network entity is described. The apparatus may include means for receiving, from a UE, a measurement report, UAI, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure,
where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity, means for transmitting, responsive to the measurement report, the UAI, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, and means for transmitting the DCI message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
A non-transitory computer-readable medium storing code for wireless communications at a first network entity is described. The code may include instructions executable by a processor to receive, from a UE, a measurement report, UAI, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity, transmit, responsive to the measurement report, the UAI, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, and transmit the DCI message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
Some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein may further include operations, features, means, or instructions for transmitting, to the second network entity, a second request for the second network entity to perform the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure with the UE based on receiving the measurement report, the UAI, or the first request from the UE and receiving, responsive to the second request, an acknowledgment message indicative of the set of uplink resources and the set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the set of uplink resources includes at least one uplink BWP associated with the second network entity and one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure and the set of downlink resources includes at least one downlink BWP associated with the at least one
uplink BWP and one or more downlink reference signals associated with the one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the first set of control messages may be further indicative of parameters associated with one or more uplink channels associated with the at least one uplink BWP, one or more reference numerologies, one or more preamble formats, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one uplink BWP, one or more repetition patterns associated with an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, one or more frequency hopping patterns associated with the initial message, one or more beam switch patterns associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of repetitions of the initial message, a threshold quantity of frequency hops associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of beam switches associated with the initial message, a set of uplink data resource or uplink control resources associated with the second network entity for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity, one or more downlink channels associated with the at least one downlink BWP, one or more control resource sets, one or more search space sets, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one downlink BWP, or any combination thereof.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the at least one downlink BWP may be associated with the first network entity and the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium may include further operations, features, means, or instructions for transmitting a TA command or a RAR of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure associated with the second network entity, where a downlink control channel used to receive the TA command or a downlink control channel used to receive the RAR may be QCL’ed with a downlink control channel used to receive the DCI message.
Some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein may further include operations, features, means, or instructions for receiving, responsive to the RAR, a feedback message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure according to a spatial filter, where the spatial
filter may be associated with a TCI state further associated with the downlink control channel used to receive the DCI message, the downlink control channel used to receive the TA command, or the downlink control channel used to receive the RAR.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the first set of control messages include one or more SI messages, one or more RRC messages, one or more MAC-CE messages, one or more second DCI messages, or any combination thereof.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the DCI message may be indicative of an identifier associated with the second network entity, an identifier associated with an uplink BWP further associated with the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, or both.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the first set of control messages may be indicative of one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure and the DCI message may be indicative of a coverage enhancement scheme from the one or more coverage enhancement schemes selected for an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the one or more coverage enhancement schemes indicated by the first set of control messages may be indicative of a first coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure in a time domain, a second coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of the initial message in a frequency domain, a third coverage enhancement scheme associated with frequency hopping of the initial message, a fourth coverage enhancement scheme associated with switching a transmission beam associated with the initial message, or any combination thereof.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the first set of control messages may be further indicative of a quantity of repetitions associated with the first coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of repetitions associated with the second coverage enhancement
scheme, a quantity of frequency hops associated with the third coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of beam switches associated with the fourth coverage enhancement scheme, an index associated with a pattern further associated with a coverage enhancement scheme of the one or more coverage enhancement schemes, oy any combination thereof.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the DCI message may be indicative of an activation of a set of uplink data resources or uplink control resources for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity or may be indicative of whether the UE may retransmit an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure prior to expiration of a timer, a control message of the first set of control messages includes an indication of the timer, and initiation of the timer may be based on the UE receiving a last symbol of the DCI message.
Some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein may further include operations, features, means, or instructions for receiving an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure based on the first set of control messages, where a first duration between reception of a last symbol of the DCI message and transmission of a first symbol of the initial message satisfies one or more thresholds.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the first duration exceeds a first threshold of the one or more thresholds and fails to exceed a second threshold of the one or more thresholds.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the first threshold may be based on a capability of the UE, a coverage enhancement scheme indicated to the UE, a duration associated with switching a BWP, a carrier frequency, a frequency range and a SCI between the first network entity and the second network entity, a processing delay, a cell re-selection delay, a transmit chain switching mode of the UE, or any combination thereof.
In some examples of the method, apparatuses, and non-transitory computer-readable medium described herein, the second threshold may be based on a validity period associated with the DCI message.
FIG. 1 shows an example of a wireless communications system that supports mobility enhancements for random access (RA) procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIG. 2 shows an example of a wireless communications system that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIG. 3 shows an example of a timing diagram that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIG. 4 shows an example of a process flow that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIGs. 5 and 6 show block diagrams of devices that support mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIG. 7 shows a block diagram of a communications manager that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIG. 8 shows a diagram of a system including a device that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIGs. 9 and 10 show block diagrams of devices that support mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIG. 11 shows a block diagram of a communications manager that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIG. 12 shows a diagram of a system including a device that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
FIGs. 13 through 16 show flowcharts illustrating methods that support mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure.
Some wireless communications systems may support Layer 1 (L1) or Layer 2 (L2) -triggered mobility (LTM) procedures. In such cases, a user equipment (UE) , communicating with a source cell, such as a first network entity, may switch communications to a target cell, such as a second network entity, in response to receiving a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) order from the first network entity. That is, the UE may receive, from the first network entity, a PDCCH order initiation a random access (RA) procedure with the second network entity. As such, the UE may transmit an initial message (e.g., msg1/msgA) of the RA procedure based on the PDCCH order and may receive, from the second network entity, a random access response (RAR) in response to the initial message. However, in some cases, a first transmission of the PDCCH order may fail or the UE may not receive the RAR. In such cases, the UE may reattempt the RA procedure with the second network entity or may select an additional network entity to attempt the RA procedure, which may increase the latency of mobility and reduce the efficiency of RA resource utilization. In other words, failure of an RA procedure may cause a resource bottleneck.
Accordingly, techniques described herein may support enhancements to the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure to improve reliability and resource utilization. For example, a first enhancement may enable the first network entity, the second network entity, or both, to provide additional information to the UE prior to the PDCCH order to support early estimation of a timing advance (TA) , among other capabilities. That is, the UE may transmit, to the first network entity, a request for the UE to perform a PDCCH-
ordered RA procedure and the first network entity, the second network entity, or both, may transmit, to the UE, the additional information including at least uplink resources and downlink resources associated with the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure.
Additionally, or alternatively, a second enhancement may enable the PDCCH order triggering the RA procedure to indicate one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the initial message transmission to the second network entity. For example, the one or more coverage enhancement schemes may indicate that one or more of the following enhancements may be enabled: repetition of the initial message in the time domain, repetition of the initial message in the frequency domain, frequency hopping of the initial message, and transmission beam switching of the initial message.
Additionally, or alternatively, a third enhancement may define a timeline associated with transmission of the PDCCH order and the initial message to support efficient resource utilization. For example, a duration between a last symbol of the PDCCH order and a first symbol of the initial message and/or a first symbol of a retransmission of the initial message may be within a specified time range. The lower threshold of the time range may be based on a capability of the UE, a time associated with switching a bandwidth part (BWP) , a frequency, a frequency range, a subcarrier spacing (SCS) , a switching mode of the UE, or any combination thereof. The upper threshold may be based on a validity period of the resources indicated by the PDCCH order.
Aspects of the disclosure are initially described in the context of wireless communications systems. Aspects of the disclosures are then described in the context of a timing diagram and a process flow. Aspects of the disclosure are further illustrated by and described with reference to apparatus diagrams, system diagrams, and flowcharts that relate to mobility enhancements for RA procedures.
FIG. 1 shows an example of a wireless communications system 100 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The wireless communications system 100 may include one or more network entities 105, one or more UEs 115, and a core network 130. In some examples, the wireless communications system 100 may be a Long Term
Evolution (LTE) network, an LTE-Advanced (LTE-A) network, an LTE-A Pro network, a New Radio (NR) network, or a network operating in accordance with other systems and radio technologies, including future systems and radio technologies not explicitly mentioned herein.
The network entities 105 may be dispersed throughout a geographic area to form the wireless communications system 100 and may include devices in different forms or having different capabilities. In various examples, a network entity 105 may be referred to as a network element, a mobility element, a radio access network (RAN) node, or network equipment, among other nomenclature. In some examples, network entities 105 and UEs 115 may wirelessly communicate via one or more communication links 125 (e.g., a radio frequency (RF) access link) . For example, a network entity 105 may support a coverage area 110 (e.g., a geographic coverage area) over which the UEs 115 and the network entity 105 may establish one or more communication links 125. The coverage area 110 may be an example of a geographic area over which a network entity 105 and a UE 115 may support the communication of signals according to one or more radio access technologies (RATs) .
The UEs 115 may be dispersed throughout a coverage area 110 of the wireless communications system 100, and each UE 115 may be stationary, or mobile, or both at different times. The UEs 115 may be devices in different forms or having different capabilities. Some example UEs 115 are illustrated in FIG. 1. The UEs 115 described herein may be capable of supporting communications with various types of devices, such as other UEs 115 or network entities 105, as shown in FIG. 1.
As described herein, a node of the wireless communications system 100, which may be referred to as a network node, or a wireless node, may be a network entity 105 (e.g., any network entity described herein) , a UE 115 (e.g., any UE described herein) , a network controller, an apparatus, a device, a computing system, one or more components, or another suitable processing entity configured to perform any of the techniques described herein. For example, a node may be a UE 115. As another example, a node may be a network entity 105. As another example, a first node may be configured to communicate with a second node or a third node. In one aspect of this example, the first node may be a UE 115, the second node may be a network entity 105, and the third node may be a UE 115. In another aspect of this example, the first node
may be a UE 115, the second node may be a network entity 105, and the third node may be a network entity 105. In yet other aspects of this example, the first, second, and third nodes may be different relative to these examples. Similarly, reference to a UE 115, network entity 105, apparatus, device, computing system, or the like may include disclosure of the UE 115, network entity 105, apparatus, device, computing system, or the like being a node. For example, disclosure that a UE 115 is configured to receive information from a network entity 105 also discloses that a first node is configured to receive information from a second node.
In some examples, network entities 105 may communicate with the core network 130, or with one another, or both. For example, network entities 105 may communicate with the core network 130 via one or more backhaul communication links 120 (e.g., in accordance with an S1, N2, N3, or other interface protocol) . In some examples, network entities 105 may communicate with one another via a backhaul communication link 120 (e.g., in accordance with an X2, Xn, or other interface protocol) either directly (e.g., directly between network entities 105) or indirectly (e.g., via a core network 130) . In some examples, network entities 105 may communicate with one another via a midhaul communication link 162 (e.g., in accordance with a midhaul interface protocol) or a fronthaul communication link 168 (e.g., in accordance with a fronthaul interface protocol) , or any combination thereof. The backhaul communication links 120, midhaul communication links 162, or fronthaul communication links 168 may be or include one or more wired links (e.g., an electrical link, an optical fiber link) , one or more wireless links (e.g., a radio link, a wireless optical link) , among other examples or various combinations thereof. A UE 115 may communicate with the core network 130 via a communication link 155.
One or more of the network entities 105 described herein may include or may be referred to as a base station 140 (e.g., a base transceiver station, a radio base station, an NR base station, an access point, a radio transceiver, a NodeB, an eNodeB (eNB) , a next-generation NodeB or a giga-NodeB (either of which may be referred to as a gNB) , a 5G NB, a next-generation eNB (ng-eNB) , a Home NodeB, a Home eNodeB, or other suitable terminology) . In some examples, a network entity 105 (e.g., a base station 140) may be implemented in an aggregated (e.g., monolithic, standalone) base station architecture, which may be configured to utilize a protocol stack that is
physically or logically integrated within a single network entity 105 (e.g., a single RAN node, such as a base station 140) .
In some examples, a network entity 105 may be implemented in a disaggregated architecture (e.g., a disaggregated base station architecture, a disaggregated RAN architecture) , which may be configured to utilize a protocol stack that is physically or logically distributed among two or more network entities 105, such as an integrated access backhaul (IAB) network, an open RAN (O-RAN) (e.g., a network configuration sponsored by the O-RAN Alliance) , or a virtualized RAN (vRAN) (e.g., a cloud RAN (C-RAN) ) . For example, a network entity 105 may include one or more of a central unit (CU) 160, a distributed unit (DU) 165, a radio unit (RU) 170, a RAN Intelligent Controller (RIC) 175 (e.g., a Near-Real Time RIC (Near-RT RIC) , a Non-Real Time RIC (Non-RT RIC) ) , a Service Management and Orchestration (SMO) 180 system, or any combination thereof. An RU 170 may also be referred to as a radio head, a smart radio head, a remote radio head (RRH) , a remote radio unit (RRU) , or a transmission reception point (TRP) . One or more components of the network entities 105 in a disaggregated RAN architecture may be co-located, or one or more components of the network entities 105 may be located in distributed locations (e.g., separate physical locations) . In some examples, one or more network entities 105 of a disaggregated RAN architecture may be implemented as virtual units (e.g., a virtual CU (VCU) , a virtual DU (VDU) , a virtual RU (VRU) ) .
The split of functionality between a CU 160, a DU 165, and an RU 170 is flexible and may support different functionalities depending on which functions (e.g., network layer functions, protocol layer functions, baseband functions, RF functions, and any combinations thereof) are performed at a CU 160, a DU 165, or an RU 170. For example, a functional split of a protocol stack may be employed between a CU 160 and a DU 165 such that the CU 160 may support one or more layers of the protocol stack and the DU 165 may support one or more different layers of the protocol stack. In some examples, the CU 160 may host upper protocol layer (e.g., layer 3 (L3) , layer 2 (L2) ) functionality and signaling (e.g., Radio Resource Control (RRC) , service data adaption protocol (SDAP) , Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) ) . The CU 160 may be connected to one or more DUs 165 or RUs 170, and the one or more DUs 165 or RUs 170 may host lower protocol layers, such as layer 1 (L1) (e.g., physical (PHY) layer) or
L2 (e.g., radio link control (RLC) layer, medium access control (MAC) layer) functionality and signaling, and may each be at least partially controlled by the CU 160. Additionally, or alternatively, a functional split of the protocol stack may be employed between a DU 165 and an RU 170 such that the DU 165 may support one or more layers of the protocol stack and the RU 170 may support one or more different layers of the protocol stack. The DU 165 may support one or multiple different cells (e.g., via one or more RUs 170) . In some cases, a functional split between a CU 160 and a DU 165, or between a DU 165 and an RU 170 may be within a protocol layer (e.g., some functions for a protocol layer may be performed by one of a CU 160, a DU 165, or an RU 170, while other functions of the protocol layer are performed by a different one of the CU 160, the DU 165, or the RU 170) . A CU 160 may be functionally split further into CU control plane (CU-CP) and CU user plane (CU-UP) functions. A CU 160 may be connected to one or more DUs 165 via a midhaul communication link 162 (e.g., F1, F1-c, F1-u) , and a DU 165 may be connected to one or more RUs 170 via a fronthaul communication link 168 (e.g., open fronthaul (FH) interface) . In some examples, a midhaul communication link 162 or a fronthaul communication link 168 may be implemented in accordance with an interface (e.g., a channel) between layers of a protocol stack supported by respective network entities 105 that are in communication via such communication links.
In wireless communications systems (e.g., wireless communications system 100) , infrastructure and spectral resources for radio access may support wireless backhaul link capabilities to supplement wired backhaul connections, providing an IAB network architecture (e.g., to a core network 130) . In some cases, in an IAB network, one or more network entities 105 (e.g., IAB nodes 104) may be partially controlled by each other. One or more IAB nodes 104 may be referred to as a donor entity or an IAB donor. One or more DUs 165 or one or more RUs 170 may be partially controlled by one or more CUs 160 associated with a donor network entity 105 (e.g., a donor base station 140) . The one or more donor network entities 105 (e.g., IAB donors) may be in communication with one or more additional network entities 105 (e.g., IAB nodes 104) via supported access and backhaul links (e.g., backhaul communication links 120) . IAB nodes 104 may include an IAB mobile termination (IAB-MT) controlled (e.g., scheduled) by DUs 165 of a coupled IAB donor. An IAB-MT may include an
independent set of antennas for relay of communications with UEs 115, or may share the same antennas (e.g., of an RU 170) of an IAB node 104 used for access via the DU 165 of the IAB node 104 (e.g., referred to as virtual IAB-MT (vIAB-MT) ) . In some examples, the IAB nodes 104 may include DUs 165 that support communication links with additional entities (e.g., IAB nodes 104, UEs 115) within the relay chain or configuration of the access network (e.g., downstream) . In such cases, one or more components of the disaggregated RAN architecture (e.g., one or more IAB nodes 104 or components of IAB nodes 104) may be configured to operate according to the techniques described herein.
In the case of the techniques described herein applied in the context of a disaggregated RAN architecture, one or more components of the disaggregated RAN architecture may be configured to support mobility enhancements for RA procedures as described herein. For example, some operations described as being performed by a UE 115 or a network entity 105 (e.g., a base station 140) may additionally, or alternatively, be performed by one or more components of the disaggregated RAN architecture (e.g., IAB nodes 104, DUs 165, CUs 160, RUs 170, RIC 175, SMO 180) .
A UE 115 may include or may be referred to as a mobile device, a wireless device, a remote device, a handheld device, or a subscriber device, or some other suitable terminology, where the “device” may also be referred to as a unit, a station, a terminal, or a client, among other examples. A UE 115 may also include or may be referred to as a personal electronic device such as a cellular phone, a personal digital assistant (PDA) , a tablet computer, a laptop computer, or a personal computer. In some examples, a UE 115 may include or be referred to as a wireless local loop (WLL) station, an Internet of Things (IoT) device, an Internet of Everything (IoE) device, or a machine type communications (MTC) device, among other examples, which may be implemented in various objects such as appliances, or vehicles, meters, among other examples.
The UEs 115 described herein may be able to communicate with various types of devices, such as other UEs 115 that may sometimes act as relays as well as the network entities 105 and the network equipment including macro eNBs or gNBs, small cell eNBs or gNBs, or relay base stations, among other examples, as shown in FIG. 1.
The UEs 115 and the network entities 105 may wirelessly communicate with one another via one or more communication links 125 (e.g., an access link) using resources associated with one or more carriers. The term “carrier” may refer to a set of RF spectrum resources having a defined physical layer structure for supporting the communication links 125. For example, a carrier used for a communication link 125 may include a portion of a RF spectrum band (e.g., a bandwidth part (BWP) ) that is operated according to one or more physical layer channels for a given radio access technology (e.g., LTE, LTE-A, LTE-A Pro, NR) . Each physical layer channel may carry acquisition signaling (e.g., synchronization signals, system information) , control signaling that coordinates operation for the carrier, user data, or other signaling. The wireless communications system 100 may support communication with a UE 115 using carrier aggregation or multi-carrier operation. A UE 115 may be configured with multiple downlink component carriers and one or more uplink component carriers according to a carrier aggregation configuration. Carrier aggregation may be used with both frequency division duplexing (FDD) and time division duplexing (TDD) component carriers. Communication between a network entity 105 and other devices may refer to communication between the devices and any portion (e.g., entity, sub-entity) of a network entity 105. For example, the terms “transmitting, ” “receiving, ” or “communicating, ” when referring to a network entity 105, may refer to any portion of a network entity 105 (e.g., a base station 140, a CU 160, a DU 165, a RU 170) of a RAN communicating with another device (e.g., directly or via one or more other network entities 105) .
Signal waveforms transmitted via a carrier may be made up of multiple subcarriers (e.g., using multi-carrier modulation (MCM) techniques such as orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) or discrete Fourier transform spread OFDM (DFT-S-OFDM) ) . In a system employing MCM techniques, a resource element may refer to resources of one symbol period (e.g., a duration of one modulation symbol) and one subcarrier, in which case the symbol period and subcarrier spacing may be inversely related. The quantity of bits carried by each resource element may depend on the modulation scheme (e.g., the order of the modulation scheme, the coding rate of the modulation scheme, or both) , such that a relatively higher quantity of resource elements (e.g., in a transmission duration) and a relatively higher order of a modulation scheme
may correspond to a relatively higher rate of communication. A wireless communications resource may refer to a combination of an RF spectrum resource, a time resource, and a spatial resource (e.g., a spatial layer, a beam) , and the use of multiple spatial resources may increase the data rate or data integrity for communications with a UE 115.
The time intervals for the network entities 105 or the UEs 115 may be expressed in multiples of a basic time unit which may, for example, refer to a sampling period of Ts=1/ (Δfmax·Nf) seconds, for which Δfmax may represent a supported subcarrier spacing, and Nf may represent a supported discrete Fourier transform (DFT) size. Time intervals of a communications resource may be organized according to radio frames each having a specified duration (e.g., 10 milliseconds (ms) ) . Each radio frame may be identified by a system frame number (SFN) (e.g., ranging from 0 to 1023) .
Each frame may include multiple consecutively-numbered subframes or slots, and each subframe or slot may have the same duration. In some examples, a frame may be divided (e.g., in the time domain) into subframes, and each subframe may be further divided into a quantity of slots. Alternatively, each frame may include a variable quantity of slots, and the quantity of slots may depend on subcarrier spacing. Each slot may include a quantity of symbol periods (e.g., depending on the length of the cyclic prefix prepended to each symbol period) . In some wireless communications systems 100, a slot may further be divided into multiple mini-slots associated with one or more symbols. Excluding the cyclic prefix, each symbol period may be associated with one or more (e.g., Nf) sampling periods. The duration of a symbol period may depend on the subcarrier spacing or frequency band of operation.
A subframe, a slot, a mini-slot, or a symbol may be the smallest scheduling unit (e.g., in the time domain) of the wireless communications system 100 and may be referred to as a transmission time interval (TTI) . In some examples, the TTI duration (e.g., a quantity of symbol periods in a TTI) may be variable. Additionally, or alternatively, the smallest scheduling unit of the wireless communications system 100 may be dynamically selected (e.g., in bursts of shortened TTIs (sTTIs) ) .
Physical channels may be multiplexed for communication using a carrier according to various techniques. A physical control channel and a physical data channel
may be multiplexed for signaling via a downlink carrier, for example, using one or more of time division multiplexing (TDM) techniques, frequency division multiplexing (FDM) techniques, or hybrid TDM-FDM techniques. A control region (e.g., a control resource set (CORESET) ) for a physical control channel may be defined by a set of symbol periods and may extend across the system bandwidth or a subset of the system bandwidth of the carrier. One or more control regions (e.g., CORESETs) may be configured for a set of the UEs 115. For example, one or more of the UEs 115 may monitor or search control regions for control information according to one or more search space sets, and each search space set may include one or multiple control channel candidates in one or more aggregation levels arranged in a cascaded manner. An aggregation level for a control channel candidate may refer to an amount of control channel resources (e.g., control channel elements (CCEs) ) associated with encoded information for a control information format having a given payload size. Search space sets may include common search space sets configured for sending control information to multiple UEs 115 and UE-specific search space sets for sending control information to a specific UE 115.
A network entity 105 may provide communication coverage via one or more cells, for example a macro cell, a small cell, a hot spot, or other types of cells, or any combination thereof. The term “cell” may refer to a logical communication entity used for communication with a network entity 105 (e.g., using a carrier) and may be associated with an identifier for distinguishing neighboring cells (e.g., a physical cell identifier (PCID) , a virtual cell identifier (VCID) , or others) . In some examples, a cell also may refer to a coverage area 110 or a portion of a coverage area 110 (e.g., a sector) over which the logical communication entity operates. Such cells may range from smaller areas (e.g., a structure, a subset of structure) to larger areas depending on various factors such as the capabilities of the network entity 105. For example, a cell may be or include a building, a subset of a building, or exterior spaces between or overlapping with coverage areas 110, among other examples.
A macro cell generally covers a relatively large geographic area (e.g., several kilometers in radius) and may allow unrestricted access by the UEs 115 with service subscriptions with the network provider supporting the macro cell. A small cell may be associated with a lower-powered network entity 105 (e.g., a lower-powered base station
140) , as compared with a macro cell, and a small cell may operate using the same or different (e.g., licensed, unlicensed) frequency bands as macro cells. Small cells may provide unrestricted access to the UEs 115 with service subscriptions with the network provider or may provide restricted access to the UEs 115 having an association with the small cell (e.g., the UEs 115 in a closed subscriber group (CSG) , the UEs 115 associated with users in a home or office) . A network entity 105 may support one or multiple cells and may also support communications via the one or more cells using one or multiple component carriers.
In some examples, a carrier may support multiple cells, and different cells may be configured according to different protocol types (e.g., MTC, narrowband IoT (NB-IoT) , enhanced mobile broadband (eMBB) ) that may provide access for different types of devices.
In some examples, a network entity 105 (e.g., a base station 140, an RU 170) may be movable and therefore provide communication coverage for a moving coverage area 110. In some examples, different coverage areas 110 associated with different technologies may overlap, but the different coverage areas 110 may be supported by the same network entity 105. In some other examples, the overlapping coverage areas 110 associated with different technologies may be supported by different network entities 105. The wireless communications system 100 may include, for example, a heterogeneous network in which different types of the network entities 105 provide coverage for various coverage areas 110 using the same or different radio access technologies.
The wireless communications system 100 may be configured to support ultra-reliable communications or low-latency communications, or various combinations thereof. For example, the wireless communications system 100 may be configured to support ultra-reliable low-latency communications (URLLC) . The UEs 115 may be designed to support ultra-reliable, low-latency, or critical functions. Ultra-reliable communications may include private communication or group communication and may be supported by one or more services such as push-to-talk, video, or data. Support for ultra-reliable, low-latency functions may include prioritization of services, and such services may be used for public safety or general commercial applications. The terms
ultra-reliable, low-latency, and ultra-reliable low-latency may be used interchangeably herein.
In some examples, a UE 115 may be configured to support communicating directly with other UEs 115 via a device-to-device (D2D) communication link 135 (e.g., in accordance with a peer-to-peer (P2P) , D2D, or sidelink protocol) . In some examples, one or more UEs 115 of a group that are performing D2D communications may be within the coverage area 110 of a network entity 105 (e.g., a base station 140, an RU 170) , which may support aspects of such D2D communications being configured by (e.g., scheduled by) the network entity 105. In some examples, one or more UEs 115 of such a group may be outside the coverage area 110 of a network entity 105 or may be otherwise unable to or not configured to receive transmissions from a network entity 105. In some examples, groups of the UEs 115 communicating via D2D communications may support a one-to-many (1: M) system in which each UE 115 transmits to each of the other UEs 115 in the group. In some examples, a network entity 105 may facilitate the scheduling of resources for D2D communications. In some other examples, D2D communications may be carried out between the UEs 115 without an involvement of a network entity 105.
The core network 130 may provide user authentication, access authorization, tracking, Internet Protocol (IP) connectivity, and other access, routing, or mobility functions. The core network 130 may be an evolved packet core (EPC) or 5G core (5GC) , which may include at least one control plane entity that manages access and mobility (e.g., a mobility management entity (MME) , an access and mobility management function (AMF) ) and at least one user plane entity that routes packets or interconnects to external networks (e.g., a serving gateway (S-GW) , a Packet Data Network (PDN) gateway (P-GW) , or a user plane function (UPF) ) . The control plane entity may manage non-access stratum (NAS) functions such as mobility, authentication, and bearer management for the UEs 115 served by the network entities 105 (e.g., base stations 140) associated with the core network 130. User IP packets may be transferred through the user plane entity, which may provide IP address allocation as well as other functions. The user plane entity may be connected to IP services 150 for one or more network operators. The IP services 150 may include access to the Internet,
Intranet (s) , an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) , or a Packet-Switched Streaming Service.
The wireless communications system 100 may operate using one or more frequency bands, which may be in the range of 300 megahertz (MHz) to 300 gigahertz (GHz) . Generally, the region from 300 MHz to 3 GHz is known as the ultra-high frequency (UHF) region or decimeter band because the wavelengths range from approximately one decimeter to one meter in length. UHF waves may be blocked or redirected by buildings and environmental features, which may be referred to as clusters, but the waves may penetrate structures sufficiently for a macro cell to provide service to the UEs 115 located indoors. Communications using UHF waves may be associated with smaller antennas and shorter ranges (e.g., less than 100 kilometers) compared to communications using the smaller frequencies and longer waves of the high frequency (HF) or very high frequency (VHF) portion of the spectrum below 300 MHz.
The wireless communications system 100 may utilize both licensed and unlicensed RF spectrum bands. For example, the wireless communications system 100 may employ License Assisted Access (LAA) , LTE-Unlicensed (LTE-U) radio access technology, or NR technology using an unlicensed band such as the 5 GHz industrial, scientific, and medical (ISM) band. While operating using unlicensed RF spectrum bands, devices such as the network entities 105 and the UEs 115 may employ carrier sensing for collision detection and avoidance. In some examples, operations using unlicensed bands may be based on a carrier aggregation configuration in conjunction with component carriers operating using a licensed band (e.g., LAA) . Operations using unlicensed spectrum may include downlink transmissions, uplink transmissions, P2P transmissions, or D2D transmissions, among other examples.
A network entity 105 (e.g., a base station 140, an RU 170) or a UE 115 may be equipped with multiple antennas, which may be used to employ techniques such as transmit diversity, receive diversity, multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) communications, or beamforming. The antennas of a network entity 105 or a UE 115 may be located within one or more antenna arrays or antenna panels, which may support MIMO operations or transmit or receive beamforming. For example, one or more base station antennas or antenna arrays may be co-located at an antenna assembly, such as an
antenna tower. In some examples, antennas or antenna arrays associated with a network entity 105 may be located at diverse geographic locations. A network entity 105 may include an antenna array with a set of rows and columns of antenna ports that the network entity 105 may use to support beamforming of communications with a UE 115. Likewise, a UE 115 may include one or more antenna arrays that may support various MIMO or beamforming operations. Additionally, or alternatively, an antenna panel may support RF beamforming for a signal transmitted via an antenna port.
Beamforming, which may also be referred to as spatial filtering, directional transmission, or directional reception, is a signal processing technique that may be used at a transmitting device or a receiving device (e.g., a network entity 105, a UE 115) to shape or steer an antenna beam (e.g., a transmit beam, a receive beam) along a spatial path between the transmitting device and the receiving device. Beamforming may be achieved by combining the signals communicated via antenna elements of an antenna array such that some signals propagating along particular orientations with respect to an antenna array experience constructive interference while others experience destructive interference. The adjustment of signals communicated via the antenna elements may include a transmitting device or a receiving device applying amplitude offsets, phase offsets, or both to signals carried via the antenna elements associated with the device. The adjustments associated with each of the antenna elements may be defined by a beamforming weight set associated with a particular orientation (e.g., with respect to the antenna array of the transmitting device or receiving device, or with respect to some other orientation) .
The UEs 115 and the network entities 105 may support retransmissions of data to increase the likelihood that data is received successfully. Hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) feedback is one technique for increasing the likelihood that data is received correctly via a communication link (e.g., a communication link 125, a D2D communication link 135) . HARQ may include a combination of error detection (e.g., using a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) ) , forward error correction (FEC) , and retransmission (e.g., automatic repeat request (ARQ) ) . HARQ may improve throughput at the MAC layer in poor radio conditions (e.g., low signal-to-noise conditions) . In some examples, a device may support same-slot HARQ feedback, in which case the device may provide HARQ feedback in a specific slot for data received via a previous
symbol in the slot. In some other examples, the device may provide HARQ feedback in a subsequent slot, or according to some other time interval.
In some examples, the wireless communications system 100 may support one or more cell (e.g., network entity 105) switch procedures, which may be referred to as mobility procedures. That is, a UE 115 may communicate with a first network entity 105 (e.g., a primary cell (PCell) ) and may switch communications to a second network entity 105 (e.g., a secondary cell (SCell) ) according to a cell change procedure from the one or more cell change procedures. In a first cell change procedure, which may be referred to as a handover (HO) procedure, the UE 115 may measure a communication link between the UE and the first network entity 105 at a Layer (L3) and transmit a measurement report indicating the L3 measurements to the first network entity 105. Additionally, the first network entity 105 may transmit a control message (e.g., RRC message) to the UE 115 indicating one or more parameters associated with the UE 115 switching communications to the second network entity 105 (e.g., triggering reconfiguration for change of the PCell and release/add for SCells when applicable) . As such, the UE 115 may switch communications to the second network entity 105 based on receiving the control message.
Similarly, in a second cell change procedure, which may be referred to as a conditional HO (CHO) procedure, the UE 115 may transmit the measurement report indicating the L3 measurements and may receive the control message indicating one or more parameters associated with the UE 115 switching communications to the second network entity 105. Additionally, the control message may indicate a set of conditions associated with the UE 115 switching communications to the second network entity 105. As such, the UE 115 may switch communications to the second network entity 105 based on satisfying one or more conditions of the set of conditions. However, in the HO procedure and the CHO procedure, the one or more parameters may be associated with a L1, L2, or both, of the UE 115 (e.g., involved L1 and L2 resets) which may result in increased latency, increased overhead, and increases in a timeline associated with switching to the second network entity 105 (e.g., longer interruption time) .
As such, the UE 115 may support a third cell change procedure, which may be referred to as an LTM procedure (e.g., L1/L2 mobility enhancements) , in which the UE 115 may be triggered to switch communications to the second network entity 105
via L1 or L2 signaling to reduce latency, reduce overhead, and reduce the timeline associated with switching to the second network entity 105 (e.g., shorter interruption time) . The LTM procedure may support dynamic switching mechanisms among candidate network entities 105 (e.g., including SpCell and SCell) , enhancements for inter-cell beam management (e.g., including L1 measurement and reporting and beam indication) , TA management, or any combination thereof. In such cases, the UE 115 may receive an indication of one or more resources associated with a RA procedure (e.g., RACH resources) to be performed by the UE 115 based on receiving a PDCCH order. The one or more resources may be associated with the second network entity 105 (e.g., candidate cell (S) ) . As such, the UE 115 may receive the PDCCH order via a control message (e.g., DCI message) triggering the UE 115 to switch communications to the second network entity 105. The PDCCH order (e.g., DCI format 1_0) may indicate a RA preamble index, an uplink or supplementary uplink indicator, a synchronization signal (SS) or physical broadcast channel (PBCH) index, a physical RACH (PRACH) mask index, one or more reserved bits, a PRACH occasion (RO) index associated with the second network entity 105, or any combination thereof. In some cases, the PDCCH order may indicate the second network entity 105 (e.g., target cell candidate (s) ) via the one or more reserved bits. As such, the UE 115 may switch communications to the second network entity 105 based on receiving the PDCCH order via a PDCCH-ordered RA procedure.
Additionally, the wireless communications system 100 may support enhancements to PDCCH-ordered RA procedures to improve reliability and resource utilization. For example, a first enhancement may enable a first network entity 105, a second network entity 105, or both, to provide additional information to the UE prior to the PDCCH order to support early estimation of a timing advance (TA) , among other capabilities. That is, the UE may transmit, to the first network entity, a request for the UE to perform a PDCCH-ordered RA procedure and the first network entity, the second network entity, or both, may transmit, to the UE, the additional information including at least RA resources associated with the UE performing early TA measurement, such as uplink resources and downlink resources.
Additionally, or alternatively, a second enhancement may enable the PDCCH order triggering the RA procedure to indicate one or more coverage
enhancement schemes associated with the initial message transmission to the second network entity. For example, the one or more coverage enhancement schemes may indicate that one or more of the following enhancements may be enabled: repetition of the initial message in the time domain, repetition of the initial message in the frequency domain, frequency hopping of the initial message, and transmission beam switching of the initial message.
Additionally, or alternatively, a third enhancement may define a timeline associated with transmission of the PDCCH order and the initial message to support efficient resource utilization. For example, a duration between a last symbol of the PDCCH order and a first symbol of the initial message and/or a first symbol of a retransmission of the initial message may be within a specified time range. The lower threshold of the time range may be based on a capability of the UE, a time associated with switching a bandwidth part (BWP) , a frequency, a frequency range, a subcarrier spacing (SCS) , a switching mode of the UE, or any combination thereof. The upper threshold may be based on a validity period of the resources indicated by the PDCCH order.
FIG. 2 shows an example of a wireless communications system 200 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The wireless communications system 200 may implement or be implemented by aspects of the wireless communication system 100. For example, the wireless communications system 200 may include one or more network entities 105 (e.g., a network entity 105-a and a network entity 105-b) and one or more UEs 115 (e.g., a UE 115-a) , which may represent examples of corresponding devices as described with reference to FIG. 1.
The wireless communications system 200 may support PDCCH-ordered RA procedures, as described with reference to FIG. 1. In such cases, a UE 115-a may communicate with a network entity 105-a and may receive a PDCCH order 205 triggering the UE 115-a to switch communications to a network entity 105-b. As such, the UE 115-a may transmit an initial message 210 to the network entity 105-b and may receive a RAR 215 in response to the initial message 210. However, in some cases, a first transmission (e.g., first PRACH transmission) of the PDCCH order 205 may fail or the UE 115-a may not receive the RAR 215. In such cases, the UE 115-a may reattempt
the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure with the network entity 105-b (e.g., autonomous retransmission of the initial message 210 using contention free RA (CFRA) resources or fall back to contention based RA (CBRA) ) or may select an additional network entity 105 to attempt the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure, which may increase the latency of mobility and reduce the efficiency of RA (e.g., PRACH) resource utilization. In other words, failure of a PDCCH-ordered RA procedure may cause a resource bottleneck.
Accordingly, techniques described herein may support enhancements to the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure to improve reliability and resource utilization and reduce latency of mobility procedures (e.g., CHO, HO, LTM) . For example, the network entity 105-a, the network entity 105-b, or both, may provide additional information (e.g., via a resource configuration 220) to the UE 115-a prior to the PDCCH order 205 to support early measurement (e.g., estimation) of a TA, among other capabilities. In some cases, as described previously with reference to FIG. 1, the UE 115-a may communicate with the network entity 105-a and may transmit one or more measurement reports indicating measurements associated with a communication link between the UE 115-a and the network entity 105-a. Additionally, or alternatively, the UE 115-a may transmit a request message 225 (e.g., or UE assistance information (UAI) ) requesting for a PDCCH-ordered RA procedure. Additionally, the request message 225 may request system information (SI) associated with the network entity 105-b (e.g., candidate target cell (s) ) , may request one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure (e.g., towards the network entity 105-b) , or both.
The network entity 105-a may transmit, to the network entity 105-b, a HO request 230 requesting for the network entity 105-b to perform the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure with the UE 115-a based on receiving the one or more measurement reports, receiving the UAI, receiving the request message 225, or any combination thereof. As such, the network entity 105-b may transmit, to the network entity 105-a, a HO acknowledgment 235 indicating that the network entity 105-a accepted the request to perform the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure with the UE 115-a. Additionally, the HO acknowledgment 235 may indicate one or more parameters (e.g., network assisted information) associated with the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure. For example, the one or more parameters may include RA resource information (e.g., a resource configuration
220) associated with the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure. As such, the network entity 105-a may transmit, to the UE 115-a, a resource configuration 220-a associated with the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure (e.g., to be used for network-initiated mobility, such as HO based on L3 measurements, or UE-initiated mobility, such as CHO or LTM) based on the RA resource information received from the network entity 105-b.
In some cases, the resource configuration 220-a may indicate RA resources to be used by the UE 115-a to enable early TA measurement for one or more network entities 105, including at least the network entity 105-b. For example, the resource configuration 220-a may indicate at least one uplink BWP (e.g., a set of uplink resources) associated with the network entity 105-b (e.g., for early TA measurement) and at least one downlink BWP (e.g., a set of downlink resources) associated with (e.g., linked to) the at least one uplink bandwidth part. As such, the network entity 105-b may measure a TA associated with the network entity 105-b based on the UE 115-a transmitting an initial message 210 in accordance with the at least one uplink BWP, the at least one downlink BWP, or both.
Additionally, the resource configuration 220-a may indicate one or more uplink channels or signals (e.g., PRACH, physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) , physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) , sounding reference signal (SRS) ) within the at least one uplink BWP, one or more patterns associated with one or more coverage enhancement schemes (e.g., patterns of coverage enhancement schemes in a time domain, a frequency domain, a space domain, or a code domain) , one or more parameters associated with the one or more patterns, or any combination thereof. The one or more patterns may include a repetition pattern associated with an initial message 210 in a time domain or a frequency domain, a switching pattern of a transmission beam used to transmit the initial message 210, a hopping pattern of the initial message 210 in the frequency domain (e.g., or sequence) , or any combination thereof. Additionally, the one or more parameters associated with the one or more patterns may include a threshold (e.g., maximum) quantity of repetitions, a threshold quantity of beam switches, a threshold quantity of hops, or any combination thereof.
Additionally, or alternatively, the resource configuration 220-a may indicate one or more downlink channels or signals (e.g., PDCCH, physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) , downlink reference signals) associated with the PDCCH-ordered RA
procedure (e.g., RAR, contention resolution, reference signal receive power (RSRP) measurement) . In some examples, the at least one downlink BWP may be associated with (e.g., configured on) the network entity 105-b (e.g., candidate target cell) . In such cases, a RAR 215 of the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure (e.g., responsive to an initial message 210) may be quasi-co-located (QCL’ed) with one or more reference signals indicated via a PDCCH order 205 (e.g., DCI) of the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure. The RAR 215 may include a TA command based on the TA measured by the network entity 105-b. Additionally, the UE 115-a may transmit, to the network entity 105-b, a feedback message (e.g., PUCCH carrying HARQ feedback) responsive to the RAR 215 (e.g., contention resolution) in accordance with (e.g., using) a first spatial filter, where the first spatial filter is the same as a spatial filter used to transmit the initial message 210 (e.g., msg1/msgA transmission ordered by the PDCCH order 205) .
Alternatively, the at least one downlink BWP may be associated with the network entity 105-a (e.g., source cell) . In such cases, the RAR 215 may be QCL’ed with a downlink control channel (e.g., PDCCH) used to receive the PDCCH order 205. Additionally, the UE 115-a may transmit, to the network entity 105-b, the feedback message responsive to the RAR 215 in accordance with (e.g., using) a second spatial filter, where the second spatial filter is associated with a transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state which is further associated with the downlink control channel (e.g., PDCCH) used to receive the PDCCH order 205 or a downlink control channel (e.g., PDCCH or PDSCH) used to receive the RAR 215. That is, the spatial filter and the downlink control channel used to receive the PDCCH order 205 or the downlink control channel used to receive the RAR 215 may be associated with a same TCI state. Additionally, the network entity 105-a may transmit, to the UE 115-a, a TA command based on the TA measured by the network entity 105-b (e.g., based on receiving an indication of the TA from the network entity 105-b) . In some examples, the network entity 105-a may transmit the resource configuration 220-a via SI, a MAC-CE message, or a DCI message.
Additionally, or alternatively, the resource configuration 220-a may indicate (e.g., via a configured grant or RRC message) a set of uplink data resource (e.g., PUSCH) or a set of uplink control resources (e.g., PUCCH) associated with (e.g., configured on) the network entity 105-b for transmission of a first uplink message (e.g.,
by the UE 115-a to the network entity 104-a) after switching (e.g., cell switching) from the network entity 105-a to the network entity 105-b.
Additionally, or alternatively, the UE 115-a may receive (e.g., autonomously or within a configured time window) , from the network entity 105-b via broadcast, a resource configuration 220-b. In some examples, the resource configuration 220-b may include SI associated with the network entity 105-b. The SI may be associated with the at least one DL BWP, one or more downlink reference signals, one or more parameters associated with resources further associated with the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure (e.g., information that may be included in the resource configuration 220-a) , or any combination thereof. Alternatively, the UE 115-a may receive SI associated with the network entity 105-b from the network entity 105-a (e.g., via a dedicated RRC message) .
In some examples, the UE 115-a may transmit, to the network entity 105-a (e.g., or the network entity 105-b, or both) an acknowledgment message 240 in response to the resource configuration 220-a, the resource configuration 220-b, or both.
Additionally, the network entity 105-a may transmit, to the UE 115-a, the PDCCH order 205 triggering the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure. The PDCCH order 205 may include information associated with mobility enhancements associated with the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure (e.g., via one or more reserved bits, one or more bits associated with an uplink or supplementary indicator, or both) . For example, the PDCCH order 205 may include an identifier associated with the network entity 105-b (e.g., identify of the candidate target cell) , an uplink BWP associated with early TA measurement, or both. The identifier associated with the network entity 105-b may be a physical cell identifier (e.g., 10 bits) , an index associated with the network entity 105-b (e.g., less than 10 bits) from a set of indices associated with additional network entities 105 (e.g., from a network configured list of candidate target cells) , or both. Additionally, the PDCCH order 205 may include a BWP index associated with the uplink BWP (e.g., if multiple uplink BWPs of the network entity 105-b are configured for the UE 115-a) .
Additionally, or alternatively, the PDCCH order 205 may indicate one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the initial message 210 (e.g., to be
transmitted to the network entity 105-b. For example, a first coverage enhancement scheme may be associated with repeating transmission of the initial message 210 in a time domain, a second coverage enhancement scheme may be associated with repeating transmission of the initial message 210 in a frequency domain (e.g., if multiple ROs are multiplexed in frequency, such as msg1-FDM=2, 4, 8) , a third coverage enhancement scheme may be associated with frequency hopping the initial message 210 (e.g., with a same or different PRACH sequence in different hops) , and a fourth coverage enhancement scheme may be associated with switching a transmission beam associated with the initial message 210 (e.g., with a same or different PRACH sequence on different transmit beams) . In some examples, the PDCCH order 205 may indicate a combination (e.g., selective combination, hybrid) of the coverage enhancement schemes. Alternatively, the PDCCH order 205 may indicate which coverage enhancements schemes may be supported (e.g., in the time domain, frequency domain, space domain, or code domain) by the network entity 105-b for the initial message 210 (e.g., may indicate if none of the coverage enhancement schemes are supported) .
Additionally, the PDCCH order 205 may indicate one or more parameters associated with the one or more coverage enhancement schemes. For example, the PDCCH order 205 may indicate a quantity (e.g., total number) of repetitions associated with the first coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of repetitions associated with the second coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of frequency hops associated with the third coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of beam switches associated with the fourth coverage enhancement scheme, an index associated with a pattern further associated with a coverage enhancement scheme of the one or more coverage enhancement schemes, or any combination thereof. For example, a pattern may be a repetition pattern in the time domain or the frequency domain, a hopping pattern in the frequency domain (e.g., or sequence) , a switching pattern of transmit beams, or any combination thereof.
Additionally, or alternatively, the PDCCH order 205 may indicate whether the UE may retransmit (e.g., autonomously) the initial message 210 prior to expiration of a timer (e.g., RRC-configured timer) . In some examples, the resource configuration 220-a, the resource configuration 220-b, or both, may indicate the timer (e.g., duration
associated with the timer) . Alternatively, the UE 115-a may receive an additional control message indicating the timer.
Additionally, or alternatively, the PDCCH order 205 may activate the set of uplink data resource (e.g., PUSCH) or the set of uplink control resources (e.g., PUCCH) associated with the network entity 105-b for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the network entity 105-a to the network entity 105-b.
In some examples, the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure may not be associated with mobility of the UE 115-a (e.g., not used for mobility) . In such cases, the PDCCH order 205 may not include the identifier associated with the network entity 105-b, may include the uplink or supplementary uplink indicator (e.g., rather than repurposing bits associated with the uplink or supplementary uplink indicator for the information associated with mobility enhancements) , or both. Additionally, the PDCCH order 205 may (e.g., via other fields) include the information associated with mobility enhancements, information associated with retransmission of the initial message 210, or both. In other words, the control message (e.g., modified DCI format 1_0) including the PDCCH order 205 may include codepoints associated with the PDCCH order 205, codepoints associated with the information associated with mobility enhancements, information associated with retransmission of the initial message 210, or both, one or more reserved bits, or any combination thereof.
As such, the UE 115-a may perform the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure based on receiving the PDCCH order 205. For example, the UE 115-a may transmit the initial message 210 (e.g., to the network entity 105-a or the network entity 105-b) and may receive the RAR 215 (e.g., from the network entity 105-a or the network entity 105-b, respectively) . Additionally, or alternatively, the UE 115-a, the network entity 105-a, the network entity 105-b, or any combination thereof, may support a timeline associated with transmission of the PDCCH order 205 and the initial message 210 to support efficient resource utilization, as described with reference to FIG. 3.
Additionally, the UE 115-a may transmit the first uplink message after switching from the network entity 105-a to the network entity 105-b via the set of uplink data resources or the set of uplink control resources indicated via the resource configuration 220-a and activate via the PDCCH order 205. In other words, the UE 115-
a may transmit, to the network entity 105-b, the first uplink message based on the TA associated with the network entity 105-b (e.g., obtained via the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure prior to cell switching) and the set of uplink data resources or the set of uplink control resources.
Though described in the context of early TA measurement, this is not to be regarded as a limitation of the present disclosure. Indeed, the techniques described herein may support early TA measurement for PDCCH-ordered RA procedures. In this regard, the techniques described herein may be considered with regards to additional use cases of PDCCH-ordered RA procedures, such as uplink synchronization or resynchronization of serving cells (e.g., network entities 105) .
FIG. 3 shows an example of a timing diagram 300 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The timing diagram 300 may implement or be implemented by aspects of the wireless communication system 100 or the wireless communications system 200. For example, the timing diagram 300 may be implemented by one or more network entities 105 and one or more UEs 115, which may represent examples of corresponding devices as described with reference to FIG. 1.
As described previously with reference to FIG. 2, multiple wireless devices, such as a UE 115 and one or more network entities 105, may support a timeline associated with transmission of a PDCCH order 305 (e.g., via a DCI message) and an initial message 310 of a RA procedure (e.g., triggered by the PDCCH order) . That is, the UE 115 may switch from a first network entity 105 (e.g., source cell) to a second network entity 105 (e.g., candidate target cell) to initiate transmission of the initial message 310 (e.g., msg1/msgA) of the RA procedure (e.g., including coverage enhancements indicated in the DCI message carrying the PDCCH order 305) based on receiving the PDCCH order 305. As such, a gap between a last symbol of the PDCCH order 305, such as a symbol 315-a, and a first symbol of a first transmission of the initial message 310, such as a symbol 315-b of the initial message 310-a, or a first symbol of a retransmission of the initial message 310, such as a symbol 315-c of the initial message 310-b, may be greater than a first threshold, TL, and less than second threshold, TU.
In other words, transmission of the symbol 315-b of the initial message 310-a, at T1, may be within a duration of reception of the symbol 315-a of the PDCCH order 305, at T0, where the duration is based on the first threshold and the second threshold. That is, the duration 320-a (e.g., T1-T0) may be greater than the first threshold and less than the second threshold. Additionally, transmission of the symbol 315-c of initial message 310-b (e.g., a grant-free, autonomous retransmission) , at T2, may be within a duration of reception of the symbol 315-a of the PDCCH order 305, at T0, where the duration is based on the first threshold and the second threshold. That is, the duration 320-b (e.g., T2-T0) may be greater than the first threshold and less than the second threshold (e.g., and greater than the duration 320-a) .
In such cases, the first threshold (e.g., TL) may be associated with a validity period of resources (e.g., PRACH/msgA resources) indicated by the PDCCH order 305, where the resources indicated by the PDCCH order 305 are allocated to the UE 115 for transmission of the initial message 310 (e.g., while the timer is active) . In other words, the first threshold may be associated with a timer (e.g., configured by a network entity 105 via RRC) for CFRA. As such, the network entity 105 (e.g., transmitting the PDCCH order 305) may release a reservation of the resources allocated to the UE 115 for transmission of the initial message 310 (e.g., including extra resources used for coverage enhancements) based on expiration of the timer and may reassign the resources to other UEs 115. In such cases, the timer may expire based on failing to receive the initial message 310 (e.g., PDCCH-ordered RA procedure is not fulfilled) .
Additionally, the first threshold may be calculated according to the following Equation 1:
TL=NT, 2A+ΔBWP_swtiching+ΔDelay+Tswitch (1)
TL=NT, 2A+ΔBWP_swtiching+ΔDelay+Tswitch (1)
where NT, 2A may represent a duration (e.g., time duration) of N2A symbols, where N2A is based on a capability of the UE 115 and corresponds to a preparation time for transmission of the initial message 310 (e.g., PRACH/PUSCH transmission) with coverage enhancements (e.g., assuming a reference SCS is a minimum SCS configuration among the PDCCH order 305 (e.g., source cell) , the PRACH (e.g., candidate target cell) , and the PUSCH (e.g., candidate target cell) ) . Additionally,
may represent an inter-frequency BWP switching duration (e.g., equal to zero if RF retuning is not needed for the active uplink BWP configured on the candidate target cell) . Additionally, ΔDelay may represent a delay associated with a frequency for transmission of the initial message 310 (e.g., 0.5 ms for FR1 and 0.25 ms for FR2) and Tswitch may represent a switching duration based on a frequency range (e.g., supported by the UE 115) , a reference SCS, a UE 115 capability, and a switching mode of the UE 115 (e.g., configured by RRC) . For example, the UE 115 may support two transmission chains, 2TX, on one carrier (e.g., source cell or the candidate target cell) or one transmission chain, 1TX, on each of two carriers (e.g., source cell and the candidate target cell) . In such cases, the UE 115 may support a switching time of “1TX-2TX” (e.g., based on {OneT} being configured by RRC parameter uplinkTXSwitching-DualUL-TxState) or “2TX-2TX” (e.g., otherwise) . In such cases, the reference SCS may be based on a threshold (e.g., minimum) SCS of a PDCCH, PRACH, PUSCH, or PUSCH transmission associated with the first network entity 105 (e.g., source cell) or the second network entity 105 (e.g., candidate target cells) . Alternatively, the reference SCS may be based on a set of rules associated with intra-frequency or inter-frequency cell-level mobility.
FIG. 4 shows an example of a process flow 400 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The process flow 400 may implement or be implemented by aspects of the wireless communication system 100, the wireless communications system 200, or the timing diagram 300. For example, the wireless communications system 200 may be implemented by one or more network entities 105 (e.g., a network entity 105-c and a network entity 105-d) and one or more UEs 115 (e.g., a UE 115-b) , which may represent examples of corresponding devices as described with reference to FIG. 1.
In some cases, at 405, the UE 115-b may transmit one or more measurement reports, UAI, or both, to the network entity 105-c.
At 410, the UE 115-b may transmit, to the network entity 105-c, a first request, which may be referred to as a RACH request, requesting a PDCCH-ordered RA procedure, where the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message (e.g., a
PDCCH order) from the network entity 105-c ordering the UE 115-b to transmit a RA message to the network entity 105-d.
In some cases, at 415, the network entity 105-c may transmit, to the network entity 105-d, a second request, which may be referred to as a HO request, requesting for the network entity 105-d to perform the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure with the UE 115-b based on receiving the measurement report, the UAI, the RACH request, or any combination thereof, from the UE 115-b.
In some cases, at 420, the network entity 105-c may receive, from the network entity 105-d and responsive to the HO request, an acknowledgment message, which may be referred to as a HO acknowledgment, indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure (e.g., a RA resource configuration) .
At 425, the UE 115-b may receive, from the network entity 105-c and responsive to the measurement report, the UAI, the RACH request, or any combination thereof, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a first RA resource configuration including a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure. The set of uplink resources may include at least one uplink BWP associated with the network entity 105-d and one or more first resources configured for the PDCCH-ordered procedure. The set of downlink resources may include at least one downlink BWP associated with the at least one uplink BWP and one or more downlink reference signals associated with the one or more first resources configured for the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure.
In some examples, the first set of control messages may further indicate parameters associated with one or more uplink channels associated with the at least one uplink BWP, one or more reference numerologies, one or more preamble formats, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one uplink BWP, one or more repetition patterns associated with an initial message of the RA communications, one or more frequency hopping patterns associated with the initial message, one or more beam switch patterns associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of repetitions of the initial message, a threshold quantity of frequency hops associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of beam switches
associated with the initial message, a set of uplink data resource or uplink control resources associated with the second network entity for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity, one or more downlink channels associated with the at least one downlink bandwidth part, one or more control resource sets, one or more search space sets, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one downlink BWP, or any combination thereof.
Additionally, or alternatively, the first set of control messages may indicate one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the RA communications. In such cases, the one or more coverage enhancement schemes indicated by the first set of control messages may be indicative of a first coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of the initial message of the RA communications in a time domain, a second coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of the initial message in a frequency domain, a third coverage enhancement scheme associated with frequency hopping of the initial message, a fourth coverage enhancement scheme associated with switching a transmission beam associated with the initial message, or any combination thereof. Additionally, the first set of control messages may further indicate a quantity of repetitions associated with the first coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of repetitions associated with the second coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of frequency hops associated with the third coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of beam switches associated with the fourth coverage enhancement scheme, an index associated with a pattern further associated with a coverage enhancement scheme of the one or more coverage enhancement schemes, oy any combination thereof.
Additionally, or alternatively, the first set of control messages may include one or more SI messages, one or more RRC messages, one or more MAC-CE messages, one or more second DCI messages, or any combination thereof.
In some examples, at 430, the UE 115-b may receive, from the network entity 105-d, a second set of control messages indicating a second RA resource configuration including SI associated with the network entity 105-d. That is, the second set of control messages may indicate one or more parameters associated with the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure, the network entity 105-d, or both.
In some cases, at 435, the UE 115-b may transmit, to the network entity 105-c, an acknowledgment message in response to receiving the first set of control messages.
At 440, the UE 115-b may receive, from the network entity 105-c, the DCI message indicating the PDCCH order. In some examples, the DCI message may indicate an identifier associated with the network entity 105-d, an identifier associated with the at least one uplink BWP further associated with the RA communications, or both.
Additionally, or alternatively, the DCI message may indicate one or more selected coverage enhancement schemes from the one or more coverage enhancement schemes indicated in the first set of control messages for the initial message of the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure.
Additionally, or alternatively, the DCI message may indicate whether the UE 115-b may retransmit the initial message of the RA communications prior to expiration of a timer, where a control message of the first control messages includes an indication of the timer and where the UE 115-b initiates the timer based on receiving a last symbol of the DCI message. Additionally, or alternatively, the DCI message may indicate an activation of the set of uplink data resource or uplink control resources associated with the second network entity for transmission of the first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity.
At 445, the UE 115-b may participate in RA communications with the network entity 105-c, the network entity 105-d, or both, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources, the set of downlink resources, or both, indicated by the first set of control messages (e.g., the first RA resource configuration) .
For example, the UE 115-b may transmit, to the network entity 105-d, the initial message (e.g., msg1/msgA) , which may be referred to as a PRACH, of the RA communications based on the first set of control messages. In some examples, a first duration between reception of a last symbol of the DCI message and transmission of a first symbol of the initial message may satisfy one or more threshold. That is, the first duration may exceed a first threshold of the one or more thresholds and fail to exceed a
second threshold of the one or more thresholds. In some examples, the first threshold may be based on a capability of the UE 115-b, a coverage enhancement scheme indicated to the UE 115-b, a duration associated with switching a BWP, a carrier frequency, a frequency range, and a subcarrier spacing between the network entity 105-c and the network entity 105-d, a processing delay, a cell re-selection delay, a transmit chain switching mode of the UE 115-b, or any combination thereof. Additionally, the second threshold may be based on a validity period associated with the DCI message (e.g., with the set of uplink resources for transmitting the initial message) .
Additionally, the UE 115-b may transmit a retransmission of the initial message of the RA communications based on transmitting the initial message, where a second duration between reception of the last symbol of the DCI message and transmission of a first symbol of the retransmission may satisfy the one or more threshold
In some examples, the network entity 105-d may determine (e.g., measure) a TA associated with the network entity 105-d based on receiving the initial message of the RA communications. As such, the UE 115-b may obtain the TA associated with the network entity 105-d based on performing a portion of the PDCCH-ordered RA procedure on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources, where the set of uplink resources, the set of downlink resources, or both, are associated with the network entity 105-c, the network entity 105-d, or both. For example, the set of downlink resources may be associated with the network entity 105-d (e.g., the downlink BWP is configured on the network entity 105-d) and the UE 115-b may receive a TA command associated with the network entity 105-d from the network entity 105-d (e.g., via the RAR) . Alternatively, the set of downlink resources may be associated with the network entity 105-c (e.g., the downlink BWP is configured on the network entity 105-d) and the network entity 105-d may transmit an indication of the TA command to the network entity 105-c. As such, the network entity 105-c may forward the TA command to the UE 115-b. In such cases, a downlink control channel used to receive the TA command may be QCL’ed with a downlink control channel used to receive the DCI message (e.g., PDCCH order) .
In some examples, the at least one downlink BWP may be associated with the network entity 105-d. In such cases, the UE 115-b may receive a RA response
(RAR) of the RA communications, where a downlink control channel used to receive the RAR is QCL’ed with a downlink reference signal associated with the initial message or with one or more reference signals indicated via the DCI message (e.g., PDCCH order) . Additionally, the UE 115-b may transmit, to the network entity 105-d and responsive to the RAR, a feedback message of the RA communications in accordance with one or more first spatial filters, where at least one of the one or more first spatial filters is associated with a beam switch pattern of the initial message. In some other examples, the at least one downlink BWP may be associated with the network entity 105-c. In such cases, the downlink control channel used to receive the RAR may be QCL’ed with a downlink control channel used to receive the DCI message (e.g., PDCCH order) . Additionally, the UE 115-b may transmit the feedback message of the RA communications in accordance with a second spatial filter, the second spatial filter is associated with a TCI state further associated with the downlink control channel used to receive the DCI message (e.g., PDCCH order) , the downlink control channel used to receive the TA command, or the downlink control channel used to receive the RAR.
FIG. 5 shows a block diagram 500 of a device 505 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The device 505 may be an example of aspects of a UE 115 as described herein. The device 505 may include a receiver 510, a transmitter 515, and a communications manager 520. The device 505 may also include a processor. Each of these components may be in communication with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) .
The receiver 510 may provide a means for receiving information such as packets, user data, control information, or any combination thereof associated with various information channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels related to mobility enhancements for RA procedures) . Information may be passed on to other components of the device 505. The receiver 510 may utilize a single antenna or a set of multiple antennas.
The transmitter 515 may provide a means for transmitting signals generated by other components of the device 505. For example, the transmitter 515 may transmit information such as packets, user data, control information, or any combination thereof associated with various information channels (e.g., control channels, data channels,
information channels related to mobility enhancements for RA procedures) . In some examples, the transmitter 515 may be co-located with a receiver 510 in a transceiver module. The transmitter 515 may utilize a single antenna or a set of multiple antennas.
The communications manager 520, the receiver 510, the transmitter 515, or various combinations thereof or various components thereof may be examples of means for performing various aspects of mobility enhancements for RA procedures as described herein. For example, the communications manager 520, the receiver 510, the transmitter 515, or various combinations or components thereof may support a method for performing one or more of the functions described herein.
In some examples, the communications manager 520, the receiver 510, the transmitter 515, or various combinations or components thereof may be implemented in hardware (e.g., in communications management circuitry) . The hardware may include a processor, a digital signal processor (DSP) , a central processing unit (CPU) , an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) , a field-programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, a microcontroller, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof configured as or otherwise supporting a means for performing the functions described in the present disclosure. In some examples, a processor and memory coupled with the processor may be configured to perform one or more of the functions described herein (e.g., by executing, by the processor, instructions stored in the memory) .
Additionally, or alternatively, in some examples, the communications manager 520, the receiver 510, the transmitter 515, or various combinations or components thereof may be implemented in code (e.g., as communications management software or firmware) executed by a processor. If implemented in code executed by a processor, the functions of the communications manager 520, the receiver 510, the transmitter 515, or various combinations or components thereof may be performed by a general-purpose processor, a DSP, a CPU, an ASIC, an FPGA, a microcontroller, or any combination of these or other programmable logic devices (e.g., configured as or otherwise supporting a means for performing the functions described in the present disclosure) .
In some examples, the communications manager 520 may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, obtaining, monitoring, outputting, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the receiver 510, the transmitter 515, or both. For example, the communications manager 520 may receive information from the receiver 510, send information to the transmitter 515, or be integrated in combination with the receiver 510, the transmitter 515, or both to obtain information, output information, or perform various other operations as described herein.
The communications manager 520 may support wireless communications at a UE in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. For example, the communications manager 520 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity. The communications manager 520 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure. The communications manager 520 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from the first network entity, the downlink control information message. The communications manager 520 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for participating in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the downlink control information message, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
By including or configuring the communications manager 520 in accordance with examples as described herein, the device 505 (e.g., a processor controlling or otherwise coupled with the receiver 510, the transmitter 515, the communications manager 520, or a combination thereof) may support techniques for PDCCH-ordered RA procedure enhancements which may result in reduced processing, reduced power
consumption, more efficient utilization of communication resources, among other advantages.
FIG. 6 shows a block diagram 600 of a device 605 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The device 605 may be an example of aspects of a device 505 or a UE 115 as described herein. The device 605 may include a receiver 610, a transmitter 615, and a communications manager 620. The device 605 may also include a processor. Each of these components may be in communication with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) .
The receiver 610 may provide a means for receiving information such as packets, user data, control information, or any combination thereof associated with various information channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels related to mobility enhancements for RA procedures) . Information may be passed on to other components of the device 605. The receiver 610 may utilize a single antenna or a set of multiple antennas.
The transmitter 615 may provide a means for transmitting signals generated by other components of the device 605. For example, the transmitter 615 may transmit information such as packets, user data, control information, or any combination thereof associated with various information channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels related to mobility enhancements for RA procedures) . In some examples, the transmitter 615 may be co-located with a receiver 610 in a transceiver module. The transmitter 615 may utilize a single antenna or a set of multiple antennas.
The device 605, or various components thereof, may be an example of means for performing various aspects of mobility enhancements for RA procedures as described herein. For example, the communications manager 620 may include a request component 625, a configuration component 630, a RA procedure component 635, or any combination thereof. The communications manager 620 may be an example of aspects of a communications manager 520 as described herein. In some examples, the communications manager 620, or various components thereof, may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, obtaining, monitoring, outputting, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the receiver 610, the transmitter
615, or both. For example, the communications manager 620 may receive information from the receiver 610, send information to the transmitter 615, or be integrated in combination with the receiver 610, the transmitter 615, or both to obtain information, output information, or perform various other operations as described herein.
The communications manager 620 may support wireless communications at a UE in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. The request component 625 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity. The configuration component 630 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure. The RA procedure component 635 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from the first network entity, the downlink control information message. The RA procedure component 635 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for participating in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the downlink control information message, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
FIG. 7 shows a block diagram 700 of a communications manager 720 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The communications manager 720 may be an example of aspects of a communications manager 520, a communications manager 620, or both, as described herein. The communications manager 720, or various components thereof, may be an example of means for performing various aspects of mobility enhancements for RA procedures as described herein. For example, the communications manager 720 may include a request component 725, a configuration component 730, a RA procedure component 735, a timing advance component 740, or any combination thereof. Each of
these components may communicate, directly or indirectly, with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) .
The communications manager 720 may support wireless communications at a UE in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. The request component 725 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity. The configuration component 730 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure. The RA procedure component 735 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from the first network entity, the downlink control information message. In some examples, the RA procedure component 735 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for participating in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the downlink control information message, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
In some examples, the timing advance component 740 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for obtaining a timing advance associated with the second network entity based on performing a portion of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages, where the set of uplink resources, the set of downlink resources, or both, are associated with the first network entity, the second network entity, or both.
In some examples, the set of uplink resources includes at least one uplink bandwidth part associated with the second network entity and one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure. In some examples, the set of downlink resources includes at least one downlink bandwidth part
associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part and one or more downlink reference signals associated with the one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
In some examples, the first set of control messages are further indicative of parameters associated with one or more uplink channels associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part, one or more reference numerologies, one or more preamble formats, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part, one or more repetition patterns associated with an initial message of the RA communications, one or more frequency hopping patterns associated with the initial message, one or more beam switch patterns associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of repetitions of the initial message, a threshold quantity of frequency hops associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of beam switches associated with the initial message, a set of uplink data resource or uplink control resources associated with the second network entity for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity, one or more downlink channels associated with the at least one downlink bandwidth part, one or more control resource sets, one or more search space sets, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one downlink bandwidth part, or any combination thereof.
In some examples, to support participating in the RA communications, the RA procedure component 735 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving a downlink reference signal associated with an initial message of the RA communications and a RA response of the RA communications, where the RA response is quasi-co-located with the downlink reference signal or one or more reference signals indicated via a the downlink control information message.
In some examples, to support participating in the RA communications, the RA procedure component 735 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting, to the second network entity and responsive to the RA response, a feedback message of the RA communications in accordance with one or more spatial filters, where at least one of the one or more spatial filters is associated with a beam switch pattern of the initial message of the RA communications.
In some examples, to support participating in the RA communications, the RA procedure component 735 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving a timing advance command or a RA response of the RA communications associated with the second network entity, where a downlink control channel used to receive the timing advance command or a downlink control channel used to receive the RA response is quasi-co-located with a downlink control channel used to receive a the downlink control information message.
In some examples, to support participating in the RA communications, the RA procedure component 735 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting, to the first network entity and responsive to the RA response, a feedback message of the RA communications according to a spatial filter, where the spatial filter is associated with a transmission configuration indicator state further associated with the downlink control channel used to receive the downlink control information message, the downlink control channel used to receive the timing advance command, or the downlink control channel used to receive the RA response.
In some examples, the first set of control messages include one or more system information messages, one or more radio resource control messages, one or more medium access control-control element messages, one or more second downlink control information messages, or any combination thereof.
In some examples, the configuration component 730 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from the second network entity, a second set of control messages that are indicative of one or more parameters associated with the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
In some examples, the downlink control information message is indicative of an identifier associated with the second network entity, an identifier associated with an uplink bandwidth part further associated with the RA communications, or both.
In some examples, the first set of control messages are indicative of one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the RA communications. In some examples, the downlink control information message is indicative of a coverage enhancement scheme from the one or more coverage enhancement schemes selected for an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
In some examples, the one or more coverage enhancement schemes indicated by the first set of control messages are indicative of a first coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of an initial message of the RA communications in a time domain, a second coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of the initial message in a frequency domain, a third coverage enhancement scheme associated with frequency hopping of the initial message, a fourth coverage enhancement scheme associated with switching a transmission beam associated with the initial message, or any combination thereof.
In some examples, the first set of control messages are further indicative of a quantity of repetitions associated with the first coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of repetitions associated with the second coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of frequency hops associated with the third coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of beam switches associated with the fourth coverage enhancement scheme, an index associated with a pattern further associated with a coverage enhancement scheme of the one or more coverage enhancement schemes, oy any combination thereof.
In some examples, the downlink control information message is indicative of an activation of a set of uplink data resources or uplink control resources for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity or is indicative of whether the UE may retransmit an initial message of the RA communications prior to expiration of a timer. In some examples, a control message of the first set of control messages includes an indication of the timer. In some examples, the UE initiates the timer based on receiving a last symbol of a the downlink control information message.
In some examples, to support participating in the RA communications, the RA procedure component 735 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting an initial message of the RA communications based on the first set of control messages, where a first duration between reception of a last symbol of the downlink control information message and transmission of a first symbol of the initial message satisfies one or more thresholds.
In some examples, to support participating in the RA communications, the RA procedure component 735 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a
means for transmitting a retransmission of the initial message of the RA communications based on transmitting the initial message, where a second duration between reception of the last symbol of the downlink control information message and transmission of a first symbol of the retransmission satisfies the one or more thresholds.
In some examples, the first duration exceeds a first threshold of the one or more thresholds and fails to exceed a second threshold of the one or more thresholds.
In some examples, the first threshold is based on a capability of the UE, a coverage enhancement scheme indicated to the UE, a duration associated with switching a bandwidth part, a carrier frequency, a frequency range and a subcarrier spacing between the first network entity and the second network entity, a processing delay, a cell re-selection delay, a transmit chain switching mode of the UE, or any combination thereof.
In some examples, the second threshold is based on a validity period associated with the downlink control information message.
FIG. 8 shows a diagram of a system 800 including a device 805 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The device 805 may be an example of or include the components of a device 505, a device 605, or a UE 115 as described herein. The device 805 may communicate (e.g., wirelessly) with one or more network entities 105, one or more UEs 115, or any combination thereof. The device 805 may include components for bi-directional voice and data communications including components for transmitting and receiving communications, such as a communications manager 820, an input/output (I/O) controller 810, a transceiver 815, an antenna 825, a memory 830, code 835, and a processor 840. These components may be in electronic communication or otherwise coupled (e.g., operatively, communicatively, functionally, electronically, electrically) via one or more buses (e.g., a bus 845) .
The I/O controller 810 may manage input and output signals for the device 805. The I/O controller 810 may also manage peripherals not integrated into the device 805. In some cases, the I/O controller 810 may represent a physical connection or port to an external peripheral. In some cases, the I/O controller 810 may utilize an operating system such as
or another known operating system. Additionally, or alternatively, the I/O controller 810 may represent or interact with a modem, a keyboard, a mouse, a touchscreen, or a similar device. In some cases, the I/O controller 810 may be implemented as part of a processor, such as the processor 840. In some cases, a user may interact with the device 805 via the I/O controller 810 or via hardware components controlled by the I/O controller 810.
In some cases, the device 805 may include a single antenna 825. However, in some other cases, the device 805 may have more than one antenna 825, which may be capable of concurrently transmitting or receiving multiple wireless transmissions. The transceiver 815 may communicate bi-directionally, via the one or more antennas 825, wired, or wireless links as described herein. For example, the transceiver 815 may represent a wireless transceiver and may communicate bi-directionally with another wireless transceiver. The transceiver 815 may also include a modem to modulate the packets, to provide the modulated packets to one or more antennas 825 for transmission, and to demodulate packets received from the one or more antennas 825. The transceiver 815, or the transceiver 815 and one or more antennas 825, may be an example of a transmitter 515, a transmitter 615, a receiver 510, a receiver 610, or any combination thereof or component thereof, as described herein.
The memory 830 may include RA memory (RAM) and read-only memory (ROM) . The memory 830 may store computer-readable, computer-executable code 835 including instructions that, when executed by the processor 840, cause the device 805 to perform various functions described herein. The code 835 may be stored in a non-transitory computer-readable medium such as system memory or another type of memory. In some cases, the code 835 may not be directly executable by the processor 840 but may cause a computer (e.g., when compiled and executed) to perform functions described herein. In some cases, the memory 830 may contain, among other things, a basic I/O system (BIOS) which may control basic hardware or software operation such as the interaction with peripheral components or devices.
The processor 840 may include an intelligent hardware device (e.g., a general-purpose processor, a DSP, a CPU, a microcontroller, an ASIC, an FPGA, a programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic component, a discrete hardware component, or any combination thereof) . In some cases, the processor 840
may be configured to operate a memory array using a memory controller. In some other cases, a memory controller may be integrated into the processor 840. The processor 840 may be configured to execute computer-readable instructions stored in a memory (e.g., the memory 830) to cause the device 805 to perform various functions (e.g., functions or tasks supporting mobility enhancements for RA procedures) . For example, the device 805 or a component of the device 805 may include a processor 840 and memory 830 coupled with or to the processor 840, the processor 840 and memory 830 configured to perform various functions described herein.
The communications manager 820 may support wireless communications at a UE in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. For example, the communications manager 820 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity. The communications manager 820 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure. The communications manager 820 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from the first network entity, the downlink control information message. The communications manager 820 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for participating in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the downlink control information message, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
By including or configuring the communications manager 820 in accordance with examples as described herein, the device 805 may support techniques for PDCCH-ordered RA procedure enhancements which may result in improved communication reliability, reduced latency, improved user experience related to reduced processing, reduced power consumption, more efficient utilization of communication resources,
improved coordination between devices, longer battery life, and improved utilization of processing capability, among other advantages.
In some examples, the communications manager 820 may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, monitoring, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the transceiver 815, the one or more antennas 825, or any combination thereof. Although the communications manager 820 is illustrated as a separate component, in some examples, one or more functions described with reference to the communications manager 820 may be supported by or performed by the processor 840, the memory 830, the code 835, or any combination thereof. For example, the code 835 may include instructions executable by the processor 840 to cause the device 805 to perform various aspects of mobility enhancements for RA procedures as described herein, or the processor 840 and the memory 830 may be otherwise configured to perform or support such operations.
FIG. 9 shows a block diagram 900 of a device 905 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The device 905 may be an example of aspects of a network entity 105 as described herein. The device 905 may include a receiver 910, a transmitter 915, and a communications manager 920. The device 905 may also include a processor. Each of these components may be in communication with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) .
The receiver 910 may provide a means for obtaining (e.g., receiving, determining, identifying) information such as user data, control information, or any combination thereof (e.g., I/Q samples, symbols, packets, protocol data units, service data units) associated with various channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels, channels associated with a protocol stack) . Information may be passed on to other components of the device 905. In some examples, the receiver 910 may support obtaining information by receiving signals via one or more antennas. Additionally, or alternatively, the receiver 910 may support obtaining information by receiving signals via one or more wired (e.g., electrical, fiber optic) interfaces, wireless interfaces, or any combination thereof.
The transmitter 915 may provide a means for outputting (e.g., transmitting, providing, conveying, sending) information generated by other components of the device 905. For example, the transmitter 915 may output information such as user data, control information, or any combination thereof (e.g., I/Q samples, symbols, packets, protocol data units, service data units) associated with various channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels, channels associated with a protocol stack) . In some examples, the transmitter 915 may support outputting information by transmitting signals via one or more antennas. Additionally, or alternatively, the transmitter 915 may support outputting information by transmitting signals via one or more wired (e.g., electrical, fiber optic) interfaces, wireless interfaces, or any combination thereof. In some examples, the transmitter 915 and the receiver 910 may be co-located in a transceiver, which may include or be coupled with a modem.
The communications manager 920, the receiver 910, the transmitter 915, or various combinations thereof or various components thereof may be examples of means for performing various aspects of mobility enhancements for RA procedures as described herein. For example, the communications manager 920, the receiver 910, the transmitter 915, or various combinations or components thereof may support a method for performing one or more of the functions described herein.
In some examples, the communications manager 920, the receiver 910, the transmitter 915, or various combinations or components thereof may be implemented in hardware (e.g., in communications management circuitry) . The hardware may include a processor, a DSP, a CPU, an ASIC, an FPGA or other programmable logic device, a microcontroller, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof configured as or otherwise supporting a means for performing the functions described in the present disclosure. In some examples, a processor and memory coupled with the processor may be configured to perform one or more of the functions described herein (e.g., by executing, by the processor, instructions stored in the memory) .
Additionally, or alternatively, in some examples, the communications manager 920, the receiver 910, the transmitter 915, or various combinations or components thereof may be implemented in code (e.g., as communications management software or firmware) executed by a processor. If implemented in code executed by a
processor, the functions of the communications manager 920, the receiver 910, the transmitter 915, or various combinations or components thereof may be performed by a general-purpose processor, a DSP, a CPU, an ASIC, an FPGA, a microcontroller, or any combination of these or other programmable logic devices (e.g., configured as or otherwise supporting a means for performing the functions described in the present disclosure) .
In some examples, the communications manager 920 may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, obtaining, monitoring, outputting, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the receiver 910, the transmitter 915, or both. For example, the communications manager 920 may receive information from the receiver 910, send information to the transmitter 915, or be integrated in combination with the receiver 910, the transmitter 915, or both to obtain information, output information, or perform various other operations as described herein.
The communications manager 920 may support wireless communications at a first network entity in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. For example, the communications manager 920 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from a UE, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity. The communications manager 920 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting, responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure. The communications manager 920 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting the downlink control information message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
By including or configuring the communications manager 920 in accordance with examples as described herein, the device 905 (e.g., a processor controlling or otherwise coupled with the receiver 910, the transmitter 915, the communications manager 920, or a combination thereof) may support techniques for PDCCH-ordered
RA procedure enhancements which may result in reduced processing, reduced power consumption, and more efficient utilization of communication resources, among other advantages.
FIG. 10 shows a block diagram 1000 of a device 1005 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The device 1005 may be an example of aspects of a device 905 or a network entity 105 as described herein. The device 1005 may include a receiver 1010, a transmitter 1015, and a communications manager 1020. The device 1005 may also include a processor. Each of these components may be in communication with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) .
The receiver 1010 may provide a means for obtaining (e.g., receiving, determining, identifying) information such as user data, control information, or any combination thereof (e.g., I/Q samples, symbols, packets, protocol data units, service data units) associated with various channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels, channels associated with a protocol stack) . Information may be passed on to other components of the device 1005. In some examples, the receiver 1010 may support obtaining information by receiving signals via one or more antennas. Additionally, or alternatively, the receiver 1010 may support obtaining information by receiving signals via one or more wired (e.g., electrical, fiber optic) interfaces, wireless interfaces, or any combination thereof.
The transmitter 1015 may provide a means for outputting (e.g., transmitting, providing, conveying, sending) information generated by other components of the device 1005. For example, the transmitter 1015 may output information such as user data, control information, or any combination thereof (e.g., I/Q samples, symbols, packets, protocol data units, service data units) associated with various channels (e.g., control channels, data channels, information channels, channels associated with a protocol stack) . In some examples, the transmitter 1015 may support outputting information by transmitting signals via one or more antennas. Additionally, or alternatively, the transmitter 1015 may support outputting information by transmitting signals via one or more wired (e.g., electrical, fiber optic) interfaces, wireless interfaces, or any combination thereof. In some examples, the transmitter 1015 and the receiver
1010 may be co-located in a transceiver, which may include or be coupled with a modem.
The device 1005, or various components thereof, may be an example of means for performing various aspects of mobility enhancements for RA procedures as described herein. For example, the communications manager 1020 may include a request component 1025, a resource configuration component 1030, a control information component 1035, or any combination thereof. The communications manager 1020 may be an example of aspects of a communications manager 920 as described herein. In some examples, the communications manager 1020, or various components thereof, may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, obtaining, monitoring, outputting, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the receiver 1010, the transmitter 1015, or both. For example, the communications manager 1020 may receive information from the receiver 1010, send information to the transmitter 1015, or be integrated in combination with the receiver 1010, the transmitter 1015, or both to obtain information, output information, or perform various other operations as described herein.
The communications manager 1020 may support wireless communications at a first network entity in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. The request component 1025 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from a UE, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity. The resource configuration component 1030 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting, responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure. The control information component 1035 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting the downlink control information message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
FIG. 11 shows a block diagram 1100 of a communications manager 1120 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The communications manager 1120 may be an example of aspects of a communications manager 920, a communications manager 1020, or both, as described herein. The communications manager 1120, or various components thereof, may be an example of means for performing various aspects of mobility enhancements for RA procedures as described herein. For example, the communications manager 1120 may include a request component 1125, a resource configuration component 1130, a control information component 1135, a feedback component 1140, a RA procedure component 1145, or any combination thereof. Each of these components may communicate, directly or indirectly, with one another (e.g., via one or more buses) which may include communications within a protocol layer of a protocol stack, communications associated with a logical channel of a protocol stack (e.g., between protocol layers of a protocol stack, within a device, component, or virtualized component associated with a network entity 105, between devices, components, or virtualized components associated with a network entity 105) , or any combination thereof.
The communications manager 1120 may support wireless communications at a first network entity in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. The request component 1125 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from a UE, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity. The resource configuration component 1130 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting, responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure. The control information component 1135 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting the downlink control information message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
In some examples, the request component 1125 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting, to the second network entity, a second request for the second network entity to perform the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure with the UE based on receiving the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the first request from the UE. In some examples, the feedback component 1140 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, responsive to the second request, an acknowledgment message indicative of the set of uplink resources and the set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
In some examples, the set of uplink resources includes at least one uplink bandwidth part associated with the second network entity and one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure. In some examples, the set of downlink resources includes at least one downlink bandwidth part associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part and one or more downlink reference signals associated with the one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
In some examples, the first set of control messages are further indicative of parameters associated with one or more uplink channels associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part, one or more reference numerologies, one or more preamble formats, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part, one or more repetition patterns associated with an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, one or more frequency hopping patterns associated with the initial message, one or more beam switch patterns associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of repetitions of the initial message, a threshold quantity of frequency hops associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of beam switches associated with the initial message, a set of uplink data resource or uplink control resources associated with the second network entity for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity, one or more downlink channels associated with the at least one downlink bandwidth part, one or more control resource sets, one or more search space sets, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one downlink bandwidth part, or any combination thereof.
In some examples, the at least one downlink bandwidth part is associated with the first network entity, and the RA procedure component 1145 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting a timing advance command or a RA response of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure associated with the second network entity, where a downlink control channel used to receive the timing advance command or a downlink control channel used to receive the RA response is quasi-co-located with a downlink control channel used to receive a the downlink control information message.
In some examples, the feedback component 1140 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, responsive to the RA response, a feedback message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure according to a spatial filter, where the spatial filter is associated with a transmission configuration indicator state further associated with the downlink control channel used to receive the downlink control information message, the downlink control channel used to receive the timing advance command, or the downlink control channel used to receive the RA response.
In some examples, the first set of control messages include one or more system information messages, one or more radio resource control messages, one or more medium access control-control element messages, one or more second downlink control information messages, or any combination thereof.
In some examples, the downlink control information message is indicative of an identifier associated with the second network entity, an identifier associated with an uplink bandwidth part further associated with the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, or both.
In some examples, the first set of control messages are indicative of one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure. In some examples, the downlink control information message is indicative of a coverage enhancement scheme from the one or more coverage enhancement schemes selected for an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
In some examples, the one or more coverage enhancement schemes indicated by the first set of control messages are indicative of a first coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure in a time domain, a second coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of the initial message in a frequency domain, a third coverage enhancement scheme associated with frequency hopping of the initial message, a fourth coverage enhancement scheme associated with switching a transmission beam associated with the initial message, or any combination thereof.
In some examples, the first set of control messages are further indicative of a quantity of repetitions associated with the first coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of repetitions associated with the second coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of frequency hops associated with the third coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of beam switches associated with the fourth coverage enhancement scheme, an index associated with a pattern further associated with a coverage enhancement scheme of the one or more coverage enhancement schemes, oy any combination thereof.
In some examples, the downlink control information message is indicative of an activation of a set of uplink data resources or uplink control resources for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity or is indicative of whether the UE may retransmit an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure prior to expiration of a timer. In some examples, a control message of the first set of control messages includes an indication of the timer. In some examples, initiation of the timer is based on the UE receiving a last symbol of a the downlink control information message.
In some examples, the RA procedure component 1145 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure based on the first set of control messages, where a first duration between reception of a last symbol of the downlink control information message and transmission of a first symbol of the initial message satisfies one or more thresholds.
In some examples, the first duration exceeds a first threshold of the one or more thresholds and fails to exceed a second threshold of the one or more thresholds.
In some examples, the first threshold is based on a capability of the UE, a coverage enhancement scheme indicated to the UE, a duration associated with switching a bandwidth part, a carrier frequency, a frequency range and a subcarrier spacing between the first network entity and the second network entity, a processing delay, a cell re-selection delay, a transmit chain switching mode of the UE, or any combination thereof.
In some examples, the second threshold is based on a validity period associated with the downlink control information message.
FIG. 12 shows a diagram of a system 1200 including a device 1205 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with one or more aspects of the present disclosure. The device 1205 may be an example of or include the components of a device 905, a device 1005, or a network entity 105 as described herein. The device 1205 may communicate with one or more network entities 105, one or more UEs 115, or any combination thereof, which may include communications over one or more wired interfaces, over one or more wireless interfaces, or any combination thereof. The device 1205 may include components that support outputting and obtaining communications, such as a communications manager 1220, a transceiver 1210, an antenna 1215, a memory 1225, code 1230, and a processor 1235. These components may be in electronic communication or otherwise coupled (e.g., operatively, communicatively, functionally, electronically, electrically) via one or more buses (e.g., a bus 1240) .
The transceiver 1210 may support bi-directional communications via wired links, wireless links, or both as described herein. In some examples, the transceiver 1210 may include a wired transceiver and may communicate bi-directionally with another wired transceiver. Additionally, or alternatively, in some examples, the transceiver 1210 may include a wireless transceiver and may communicate bi-directionally with another wireless transceiver. In some examples, the device 1205 may include one or more antennas 1215, which may be capable of transmitting or receiving wireless transmissions (e.g., concurrently) . The transceiver 1210 may also include a
modem to modulate signals, to provide the modulated signals for transmission (e.g., by one or more antennas 1215, by a wired transmitter) , to receive modulated signals (e.g., from one or more antennas 1215, from a wired receiver) , and to demodulate signals. In some implementations, the transceiver 1210 may include one or more interfaces, such as one or more interfaces coupled with the one or more antennas 1215 that are configured to support various receiving or obtaining operations, or one or more interfaces coupled with the one or more antennas 1215 that are configured to support various transmitting or outputting operations, or a combination thereof. In some implementations, the transceiver 1210 may include or be configured for coupling with one or more processors or memory components that are operable to perform or support operations based on received or obtained information or signals, or to generate information or other signals for transmission or other outputting, or any combination thereof. In some implementations, the transceiver 1210, or the transceiver 1210 and the one or more antennas 1215, or the transceiver 1210 and the one or more antennas 1215 and one or more processors or memory components (for example, the processor 1235, or the memory 1225, or both) , may be included in a chip or chip assembly that is installed in the device 1205. In some examples, the transceiver may be operable to support communications via one or more communications links (e.g., a communication link 125, a backhaul communication link 120, a midhaul communication link 162, a fronthaul communication link 168) .
The memory 1225 may include RAM and ROM. The memory 1225 may store computer-readable, computer-executable code 1230 including instructions that, when executed by the processor 1235, cause the device 1205 to perform various functions described herein. The code 1230 may be stored in a non-transitory computer-readable medium such as system memory or another type of memory. In some cases, the code 1230 may not be directly executable by the processor 1235 but may cause a computer (e.g., when compiled and executed) to perform functions described herein. In some cases, the memory 1225 may contain, among other things, a BIOS which may control basic hardware or software operation such as the interaction with peripheral components or devices.
The processor 1235 may include an intelligent hardware device (e.g., a general-purpose processor, a DSP, an ASIC, a CPU, an FPGA, a microcontroller, a
programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic, a discrete hardware component, or any combination thereof) . In some cases, the processor 1235 may be configured to operate a memory array using a memory controller. In some other cases, a memory controller may be integrated into the processor 1235. The processor 1235 may be configured to execute computer-readable instructions stored in a memory (e.g., the memory 1225) to cause the device 1205 to perform various functions (e.g., functions or tasks supporting mobility enhancements for RA procedures) . For example, the device 1205 or a component of the device 1205 may include a processor 1235 and memory 1225 coupled with the processor 1235, the processor 1235 and memory 1225 configured to perform various functions described herein. The processor 1235 may be an example of a cloud-computing platform (e.g., one or more physical nodes and supporting software such as operating systems, virtual machines, or container instances) that may host the functions (e.g., by executing code 1230) to perform the functions of the device 1205. The processor 1235 may be any one or more suitable processors capable of executing scripts or instructions of one or more software programs stored in the device 1205 (such as within the memory 1225) . In some implementations, the processor 1235 may be a component of a processing system. A processing system may generally refer to a system or series of machines or components that receives inputs and processes the inputs to produce a set of outputs (which may be passed to other systems or components of, for example, the device 1205) . For example, a processing system of the device 1205 may refer to a system including the various other components or subcomponents of the device 1205, such as the processor 1235, or the transceiver 1210, or the communications manager 1220, or other components or combinations of components of the device 1205. The processing system of the device 1205 may interface with other components of the device 1205, and may process information received from other components (such as inputs or signals) or output information to other components. For example, a chip or modem of the device 1205 may include a processing system and one or more interfaces to output information, or to obtain information, or both. The one or more interfaces may be implemented as or otherwise include a first interface configured to output information and a second interface configured to obtain information, or a same interface configured to output information and to obtain information, among other implementations. In some implementations, the one or more interfaces may refer to an interface between the processing system of the chip or modem and a transmitter, such
that the device 1205 may transmit information output from the chip or modem. Additionally, or alternatively, in some implementations, the one or more interfaces may refer to an interface between the processing system of the chip or modem and a receiver, such that the device 1205 may obtain information or signal inputs, and the information may be passed to the processing system. A person having ordinary skill in the art will readily recognize that a first interface also may obtain information or signal inputs, and a second interface also may output information or signal outputs.
In some examples, a bus 1240 may support communications of (e.g., within) a protocol layer of a protocol stack. In some examples, a bus 1240 may support communications associated with a logical channel of a protocol stack (e.g., between protocol layers of a protocol stack) , which may include communications performed within a component of the device 1205, or between different components of the device 1205 that may be co-located or located in different locations (e.g., where the device 1205 may refer to a system in which one or more of the communications manager 1220, the transceiver 1210, the memory 1225, the code 1230, and the processor 1235 may be located in one of the different components or divided between different components) .
In some examples, the communications manager 1220 may manage aspects of communications with a core network 130 (e.g., via one or more wired or wireless backhaul links) . For example, the communications manager 1220 may manage the transfer of data communications for client devices, such as one or more UEs 115. In some examples, the communications manager 1220 may manage communications with other network entities 105, and may include a controller or scheduler for controlling communications with UEs 115 in cooperation with other network entities 105. In some examples, the communications manager 1220 may support an X2 interface within an LTE/LTE-A wireless communications network technology to provide communication between network entities 105.
The communications manager 1220 may support wireless communications at a first network entity in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. For example, the communications manager 1220 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for receiving, from a UE, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information
message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity. The communications manager 1220 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting, responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure. The communications manager 1220 is capable of, configured to, or operable to support a means for transmitting the downlink control information message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
By including or configuring the communications manager 1220 in accordance with examples as described herein, the device 1205 may support techniques for PDCCH-ordered RA procedure enhancements which may result in improved communication reliability, reduced latency, improved user experience related to reduced processing, reduced power consumption, more efficient utilization of communication resources, improved coordination between devices, longer battery life, and improved utilization of processing capability, among other advantages.
In some examples, the communications manager 1220 may be configured to perform various operations (e.g., receiving, obtaining, monitoring, outputting, transmitting) using or otherwise in cooperation with the transceiver 1210, the one or more antennas 1215 (e.g., where applicable) , or any combination thereof. Although the communications manager 1220 is illustrated as a separate component, in some examples, one or more functions described with reference to the communications manager 1220 may be supported by or performed by the transceiver 1210, the processor 1235, the memory 1225, the code 1230, or any combination thereof. For example, the code 1230 may include instructions executable by the processor 1235 to cause the device 1205 to perform various aspects of mobility enhancements for RA procedures as described herein, or the processor 1235 and the memory 1225 may be otherwise configured to perform or support such operations.
FIG. 13 shows a flowchart illustrating a method 1300 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure. The operations of the method 1300 may be implemented by a UE or its components as described herein. For example, the operations of the method 1300 may be performed by
a UE 115 as described with reference to FIGs. 1 through 8. In some examples, a UE may execute a set of instructions to control the functional elements of the wireless UE to perform the described functions. Additionally, or alternatively, the wireless UE may perform aspects of the described functions using special-purpose hardware.
At 1305, the method may include transmitting, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity. The operations of 1305 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1305 may be performed by a request component 725 as described with reference to FIG. 7.
At 1310, the method may include receiving, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure. The operations of 1310 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1310 may be performed by a configuration component 730 as described with reference to FIG. 7.
At 1315, the method may include receiving, from the first network entity, the downlink control information message. The operations of 1315 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1315 may be performed by a RA procedure component 735 as described with reference to FIG. 7.
At 1320, the method may include participating in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the downlink control information message, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages. The operations of 1320 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1320 may be performed by a RA procedure component 735 as described with reference to FIG. 7.
FIG. 14 shows a flowchart illustrating a method 1400 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure. The operations of the method 1400 may be implemented by a UE or its components as described herein. For example, the operations of the method 1400 may be performed by a UE 115 as described with reference to FIGs. 1 through 8. In some examples, a UE may execute a set of instructions to control the functional elements of the wireless UE to perform the described functions. Additionally, or alternatively, the wireless UE may perform aspects of the described functions using special-purpose hardware.
At 1405, the method may include transmitting, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity. The operations of 1405 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1405 may be performed by a request component 725 as described with reference to FIG. 7.
At 1410, the method may include receiving, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure. The operations of 1410 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1410 may be performed by a configuration component 730 as described with reference to FIG. 7.
At 1415, the method may include receiving, from the first network entity, the downlink control information message. The operations of 1415 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1415 may be performed by a RA procedure component 735 as described with reference to FIG. 7.
At 1420, the method may include participating in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the downlink control information message, where at least a portion of the RA communications are based on the set of uplink
resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages. The operations of 1420 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1420 may be performed by a RA procedure component 735 as described with reference to FIG. 7.
FIG. 15 shows a flowchart illustrating a method 1500 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure. The operations of the method 1500 may be implemented by a network entity or its components as described herein. For example, the operations of the method 1500 may be performed by a network entity as described with reference to FIGs. 1 through 4 and 9 through 12. In some examples, a network entity may execute a set of instructions to control the functional elements of the wireless network entity to perform the described functions. Additionally, or alternatively, the wireless network entity may perform aspects of the described functions using special-purpose hardware.
At 1505, the method may include receiving, from a UE, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity. The operations of 1505 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1505 may be performed by a request component 1125 as described with reference to FIG. 11.
At 1510, the method may include transmitting, responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure. The operations of 1510 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1510 may be performed by a resource configuration component 1130 as described with reference to FIG. 11.
At 1515, the method may include transmitting the downlink control information message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages. The operations of 1515 may be performed in accordance with examples as
disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1515 may be performed by a control information component 1135 as described with reference to FIG. 11.
FIG. 16 shows a flowchart illustrating a method 1600 that supports mobility enhancements for RA procedures in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure. The operations of the method 1600 may be implemented by a network entity or its components as described herein. For example, the operations of the method 1600 may be performed by a network entity as described with reference to FIGs. 1 through 4 and 9 through 12. In some examples, a network entity may execute a set of instructions to control the functional elements of the wireless network entity to perform the described functions. Additionally, or alternatively, the wireless network entity may perform aspects of the described functions using special-purpose hardware.
At 1605, the method may include receiving, from a UE, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, where the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity. The operations of 1605 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1605 may be performed by a request component 1125 as described with reference to FIG. 11.
At 1610, the method may include transmitting, responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure. The operations of 1610 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1610 may be performed by a resource configuration component 1130 as described with reference to FIG. 11.
At 1615, the method may include transmitting the downlink control information message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages. The operations of 1615 may be performed in accordance with examples as disclosed herein. In some examples, aspects of the operations of 1615 may be
performed by a control information component 1135 as described with reference to FIG. 11.
The following provides an overview of aspects of the present disclosure:
Aspect 1: A method for wireless communications at a UE, comprising: transmitting, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UAI, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, wherein the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity; receiving, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UAI, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure; receiving, from the first network entity, the DCI message; and participating in RA communications with the second network entity, responsive to the DCI message, wherein at least a portion of the RA communications are based at least in part on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
Aspect 2: The method of aspect 1, further comprising: obtaining a TA associated with the second network entity based at least in part on performing a portion of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages, wherein the set of uplink resources, the set of downlink resources, or both, are associated with the first network entity, the second network entity, or both.
Aspect 3: The method of any of aspects 1 through 2, wherein the set of uplink resources comprises at least one uplink BWP associated with the second network entity and one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, and the set of downlink resources comprises at least one downlink BWP associated with the at least one uplink BWP and one or more downlink reference signals associated with the one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
Aspect 4: The method of aspect 3, wherein the first set of control messages are further indicative of parameters associated with one or more uplink channels
associated with the at least one uplink BWP, one or more reference numerologies, one or more preamble formats, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one uplink BWP, one or more repetition patterns associated with an initial message of the RA communications, one or more frequency hopping patterns associated with the initial message, one or more beam switch patterns associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of repetitions of the initial message, a threshold quantity of frequency hops associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of beam switches associated with the initial message, a set of uplink data resource or uplink control resources associated with the second network entity for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity, one or more downlink channels associated with the at least one downlink BWP, one or more control resource sets, one or more search space sets, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one downlink BWP, or any combination thereof.
Aspect 5: The method of any of aspects 3 through 4, wherein the at least one downlink BWP is associated with the second network entity, and wherein participating in the RA communications comprises: receiving a downlink reference signal associated with an initial message of the RA communications and a RAR of the RA communications, wherein the RAR is QCL’ed with the downlink reference signal or one or more reference signals indicated via the DCI message.
Aspect 6: The method of aspect 5, wherein participating in the RA communications comprises: transmitting, to the second network entity and responsive to the RAR, a feedback message of the RA communications in accordance with one or more spatial filters, wherein at least one of the one or more spatial filters is associated with a beam switch pattern of the initial message of the RA communications.
Aspect 7: The method of any of aspects 3 through 4, wherein the at least one downlink BWP is associated with the first network entity, and wherein participating in the RA communications comprises: receiving a TA command or a RAR of the RA communications associated with the second network entity, wherein a downlink control channel used to receive the TA command or a downlink control channel used to receive the RAR is QCL’ed with a downlink control channel used to receive the DCI message.
Aspect 8: The method of aspect 7, wherein participating in the RA communications comprises: transmitting, to the first network entity and responsive to the RAR, a feedback message of the RA communications according to a spatial filter, wherein the spatial filter is associated with a TCI state further associated with the downlink control channel used to receive the DCI message, the downlink control channel used to receive the TA command, or the downlink control channel used to receive the RAR.
Aspect 9: The method of any of aspects 1 through 8, wherein the first set of control messages comprise one or more SI messages, one or more RRC messages, one or more MAC-CE messages, one or more second DCI messages, or any combination thereof.
Aspect 10: The method of any of aspects 1 through 9, further comprising: receiving, from the second network entity, a second set of control messages that are indicative of one or more parameters associated with the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
Aspect 11: The method of any of aspects 1 through 10, wherein the DCI message is indicative of an identifier associated with the second network entity, an identifier associated with an uplink BWP further associated with the RA communications, or both.
Aspect 12: The method of any of aspects 1 through 11, wherein the first set of control messages are indicative of one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the RA communications, and the DCI message is indicative of a coverage enhancement scheme from the one or more coverage enhancement schemes selected for an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
Aspect 13: The method of aspect 12, wherein the one or more coverage enhancement schemes indicated by the first set of control messages are indicative of a first coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of an initial message of the RA communications in a time domain, a second coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of the initial message in a frequency domain, a third coverage enhancement scheme associated with frequency hopping of the
initial message, a fourth coverage enhancement scheme associated with switching a transmission beam associated with the initial message, or any combination thereof.
Aspect 14: The method of aspect 13, wherein the first set of control messages are further indicative of a quantity of repetitions associated with the first coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of repetitions associated with the second coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of frequency hops associated with the third coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of beam switches associated with the fourth coverage enhancement scheme, an index associated with a pattern further associated with a coverage enhancement scheme of the one or more coverage enhancement schemes, oy any combination thereof.
Aspect 15: The method of any of aspects 1 through 14, wherein the DCI message is indicative of an activation of a set of uplink data resources or uplink control resources for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity or is indicative of whether the UE may retransmit an initial message of the RA communications prior to expiration of a timer, a control message of the first set of control messages comprises an indication of the timer, and the UE initiates the timer based at least in part on receiving a last symbol of the DCI message.
Aspect 16: The method of any of aspects 1 through 15, wherein participating in the RA communications comprises: transmitting an initial message of the RA communications based at least in part on the first set of control messages, wherein a first duration between reception of a last symbol of the DCI message and transmission of a first symbol of the initial message satisfies one or more thresholds.
Aspect 17: The method of aspect 16, wherein participating in the RA communications comprises: transmitting a retransmission of the initial message of the RA communications based at least in part on transmitting the initial message, wherein a second duration between reception of the last symbol of the DCI message and transmission of a first symbol of the retransmission satisfies the one or more thresholds.
Aspect 18: The method of any of aspects 16 through 17, wherein the first duration exceeds a first threshold of the one or more thresholds and fails to exceed a second threshold of the one or more thresholds.
Aspect 19: The method of aspect 18, wherein the first threshold is based at least in part on a capability of the UE, a coverage enhancement scheme indicated to the UE, a duration associated with switching a BWP, a carrier frequency, a frequency range and a SCI between the first network entity and the second network entity, a processing delay, a cell re-selection delay, a transmit chain switching mode of the UE, or any combination thereof.
Aspect 20: The method of any of aspects 18 through 19, wherein the second threshold is based at least in part on a validity period associated with the DCI message.
Aspect 21: A method for wireless communications at a first network entity, comprising: receiving, from a UE, a measurement report, UAI, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, wherein the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure includes a DCI message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a RA message to a second network entity; transmitting, responsive to the measurement report, the UAI, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure; and transmitting the DCI message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
Aspect 22: The method of aspect 21, further comprising: transmitting, to the second network entity, a second request for the second network entity to perform the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure with the UE based at least in part on receiving the measurement report, the UAI, or the first request from the UE; and receiving, responsive to the second request, an acknowledgment message indicative of the set of uplink resources and the set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
Aspect 23: The method of any of aspects 21 through 22, wherein the set of uplink resources comprises at least one uplink BWP associated with the second network entity and one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, and the set of downlink resources comprises at least one downlink BWP associated with the at least one uplink BWP and one or more downlink reference signals associated with the one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
Aspect 24: The method of aspect 23, wherein the first set of control messages are further indicative of parameters associated with one or more uplink channels associated with the at least one uplink BWP, one or more reference numerologies, one or more preamble formats, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one uplink BWP, one or more repetition patterns associated with an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, one or more frequency hopping patterns associated with the initial message, one or more beam switch patterns associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of repetitions of the initial message, a threshold quantity of frequency hops associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of beam switches associated with the initial message, a set of uplink data resource or uplink control resources associated with the second network entity for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity, one or more downlink channels associated with the at least one downlink BWP, one or more control resource sets, one or more search space sets, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one downlink BWP, or any combination thereof.
Aspect 25: The method of any of aspects 23 through 24, wherein the at least one downlink BWP is associated with the first network entity, the method further comprising: transmitting a TA command or a RAR of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure associated with the second network entity, wherein a downlink control channel used to receive the TA command or a downlink control channel used to receive the RAR is QCL’ed with a downlink control channel used to receive the DCI message.
Aspect 26: The method of aspect 25, further comprising: receiving, responsive to the RAR, a feedback message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure according to a spatial filter, wherein the spatial filter is associated with a TCI state further associated with the downlink control channel used to receive the DCI message, the downlink control channel used to receive the TA command, or the downlink control channel used to receive the RAR.
Aspect 27: The method of any of aspects 21 through 26, wherein the first set of control messages comprise one or more SI messages, one or more RRC messages,
one or more MAC-CE messages, one or more second DCI messages, or any combination thereof.
Aspect 28: The method of any of aspects 21 through 27, wherein the DCI message is indicative of an identifier associated with the second network entity, an identifier associated with an uplink BWP further associated with the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, or both.
Aspect 29: The method of any of aspects 21 through 28, wherein the first set of control messages are indicative of one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure, and the DCI message is indicative of a coverage enhancement scheme from the one or more coverage enhancement schemes selected for an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure.
Aspect 30: The method of aspect 29, wherein the one or more coverage enhancement schemes indicated by the first set of control messages are indicative of a first coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure in a time domain, a second coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of the initial message in a frequency domain, a third coverage enhancement scheme associated with frequency hopping of the initial message, a fourth coverage enhancement scheme associated with switching a transmission beam associated with the initial message, or any combination thereof.
Aspect 31: The method of aspect 30, wherein the first set of control messages are further indicative of a quantity of repetitions associated with the first coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of repetitions associated with the second coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of frequency hops associated with the third coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of beam switches associated with the fourth coverage enhancement scheme, an index associated with a pattern further associated with a coverage enhancement scheme of the one or more coverage enhancement schemes, oy any combination thereof.
Aspect 32: The method of any of aspects 21 through 31, wherein the DCI message is indicative of an activation of a set of uplink data resources or uplink control
resources for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity or is indicative of whether the UE may retransmit an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure prior to expiration of a timer, a control message of the first set of control messages comprises an indication of the timer, and initiation of the timer is based at least in part on the UE receiving a last symbol of the DCI message.
Aspect 33: The method of any of aspects 21 through 32, further comprising: receiving an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered RA procedure based at least in part on the first set of control messages, wherein a first duration between reception of a last symbol of the DCI message and transmission of a first symbol of the initial message satisfies one or more thresholds.
Aspect 34: The method of aspect 33, wherein the first duration exceeds a first threshold of the one or more thresholds and fails to exceed a second threshold of the one or more thresholds.
Aspect 35: The method of aspect 34, wherein the first threshold is based at least in part on a capability of the UE, a coverage enhancement scheme indicated to the UE, a duration associated with switching a BWP, a carrier frequency, a frequency range and a SCI between the first network entity and the second network entity, a processing delay, a cell re-selection delay, a transmit chain switching mode of the UE, or any combination thereof.
Aspect 36: The method of any of aspects 34 through 35, wherein the second threshold is based at least in part on a validity period associated with the DCI message.
Aspect 37: An apparatus for wireless communications at a UE, comprising a processor; memory coupled with the processor; and instructions stored in the memory and executable by the processor to cause the apparatus to perform a method of any of aspects 1 through 20.
Aspect 38: An apparatus for wireless communications at a UE, comprising at least one means for performing a method of any of aspects 1 through 20.
Aspect 39: A non-transitory computer-readable medium storing code for wireless communications at a UE, the code comprising instructions executable by a processor to perform a method of any of aspects 1 through 20.
Aspect 40: An apparatus for wireless communications at a first network entity, comprising a processor; memory coupled with the processor; and instructions stored in the memory and executable by the processor to cause the apparatus to perform a method of any of aspects 21 through 36.
Aspect 41: An apparatus for wireless communications at a first network entity, comprising at least one means for performing a method of any of aspects 21 through 36.
Aspect 42: A non-transitory computer-readable medium storing code for wireless communications at a first network entity, the code comprising instructions executable by a processor to perform a method of any of aspects 21 through 36.
It should be noted that the methods described herein describe possible implementations, and that the operations and the steps may be rearranged or otherwise modified and that other implementations are possible. Further, aspects from two or more of the methods may be combined.
Although aspects of an LTE, LTE-A, LTE-A Pro, or NR system may be described for purposes of example, and LTE, LTE-A, LTE-A Pro, or NR terminology may be used in much of the description, the techniques described herein are applicable beyond LTE, LTE-A, LTE-A Pro, or NR networks. For example, the described techniques may be applicable to various other wireless communications systems such as Ultra Mobile Broadband (UMB) , Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.11 (Wi-Fi) , IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX) , IEEE 802.20, Flash-OFDM, as well as other systems and radio technologies not explicitly mentioned herein.
Information and signals described herein may be represented using any of a variety of different technologies and techniques. For example, data, instructions, commands, information, signals, bits, symbols, and chips that may be referenced throughout the description may be represented by voltages, currents, electromagnetic
waves, magnetic fields or particles, optical fields or particles, or any combination thereof.
The various illustrative blocks and components described in connection with the disclosure herein may be implemented or performed using a general-purpose processor, a DSP, an ASIC, a CPU, an FPGA or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof designed to perform the functions described herein. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor but, in the alternative, the processor may be any processor, controller, microcontroller, or state machine. A processor may also be implemented as a combination of computing devices (e.g., a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, multiple microprocessors, one or more microprocessors in conjunction with a DSP core, or any other such configuration) .
The functions described herein may be implemented using hardware, software executed by a processor, firmware, or any combination thereof. If implemented using software executed by a processor, the functions may be stored as or transmitted using one or more instructions or code of a computer-readable medium. Other examples and implementations are within the scope of the disclosure and appended claims. For example, due to the nature of software, functions described herein may be implemented using software executed by a processor, hardware, firmware, hardwiring, or combinations of any of these. Features implementing functions may also be physically located at various positions, including being distributed such that portions of functions are implemented at different physical locations.
Computer-readable media includes both non-transitory computer storage media and communication media including any medium that facilitates transfer of a computer program from one location to another. A non-transitory storage medium may be any available medium that may be accessed by a general-purpose or special-purpose computer. By way of example, and not limitation, non-transitory computer-readable media may include RAM, ROM, electrically erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM) , flash memory, compact disk (CD) ROM or other optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, or any other non-transitory medium that may be used to carry or store desired program code means in the form of instructions or data structures and that may be accessed by a general-purpose or special-purpose computer,
or a general-purpose or special-purpose processor. Also, any connection is properly termed a computer-readable medium. For example, if the software is transmitted from a website, server, or other remote source using a coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, digital subscriber line (DSL) , or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave, then the coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, DSL, or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave are included in the definition of computer-readable medium. Disk and disc, as used herein, include CD, laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc (DVD) , floppy disk and Blu-ray disc. Disks may reproduce data magnetically, and discs may reproduce data optically using lasers. Combinations of the above are also included within the scope of computer-readable media.
As used herein, including in the claims, “or” as used in a list of items (e.g., a list of items prefaced by a phrase such as “at least one of” or “one or more of” ) indicates an inclusive list such that, for example, a list of at least one of A, B, or C means A or B or C or AB or AC or BC or ABC (i.e., A and B and C) . Also, as used herein, the phrase “based on” shall not be construed as a reference to a closed set of conditions. For example, an example step that is described as “based on condition A” may be based on both a condition A and a condition B without departing from the scope of the present disclosure. In other words, as used herein, the phrase “based on” shall be construed in the same manner as the phrase “based at least in part on. ”
The term “determine” or “determining” encompasses a variety of actions and, therefore, “determining” can include calculating, computing, processing, deriving, investigating, looking up (such as via looking up in a table, a database or another data structure) , ascertaining and the like. Also, “determining” can include receiving (e.g., receiving information) , accessing (e.g., accessing data stored in memory) and the like. Also, “determining” can include resolving, obtaining, selecting, choosing, establishing, and other such similar actions.
In the appended figures, similar components or features may have the same reference label. Further, various components of the same type may be distinguished by following the reference label by a dash and a second label that distinguishes among the similar components. If just the first reference label is used in the specification, the description is applicable to any one of the similar components having the same first
reference label irrespective of the second reference label, or other subsequent reference label.
The description set forth herein, in connection with the appended drawings, describes example configurations and does not represent all the examples that may be implemented or that are within the scope of the claims. The term “example” used herein means “serving as an example, instance, or illustration, ” and not “preferred” or “advantageous over other examples. ” The detailed description includes specific details for the purpose of providing an understanding of the described techniques. These techniques, however, may be practiced without these specific details. In some instances, known structures and devices are shown in block diagram form in order to avoid obscuring the concepts of the described examples.
The description herein is provided to enable a person having ordinary skill in the art to make or use the disclosure. Various modifications to the disclosure will be apparent to a person having ordinary skill in the art, and the generic principles defined herein may be applied to other variations without departing from the scope of the disclosure. Thus, the disclosure is not limited to the examples and designs described herein but is to be accorded the broadest scope consistent with the principles and novel features disclosed herein.
Claims (76)
- An apparatus for wireless communications at a user equipment (UE) , comprising:a processor;memory coupled with the processor; andinstructions stored in the memory and executable by the processor to cause the apparatus to:transmit, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure, wherein the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a random access message to a second network entity;receive, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure;receive, from the first network entity, the downlink control information message; andparticipate in random access communications with the second network entity, responsive to the downlink control information message, wherein at least a portion of the random access communications are based at least in part on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
- The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the instructions are further executable by the processor to cause the apparatus to:obtain a timing advance associated with the second network entity based at least in part on performing a portion of the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages, wherein the set of uplink resources, the set of downlink resources, or both, are associated with the first network entity, the second network entity, or both.
- The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the set of uplink resources comprises at least one uplink bandwidth part associated with the second network entity and one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure, and wherein the set of downlink resources comprises at least one downlink bandwidth part associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part and one or more downlink reference signals associated with the one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure.
- The apparatus of claim 3, wherein the first set of control messages are further indicative of parameters associated with one or more uplink channels associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part, one or more reference numerologies, one or more preamble formats, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part, one or more repetition patterns associated with an initial message of the random access communications, one or more frequency hopping patterns associated with the initial message, one or more beam switch patterns associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of repetitions of the initial message, a threshold quantity of frequency hops associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of beam switches associated with the initial message, a set of uplink data resource or uplink control resources associated with the second network entity for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity, one or more downlink channels associated with the at least one downlink bandwidth part, one or more control resource sets, one or more search space sets, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one downlink bandwidth part, or any combination thereof.
- The apparatus of claim 3, wherein the instructions to participate in the random access communications are executable by the processor to cause the apparatus to:receive a downlink reference signal associated with an initial message of the random access communications and a random access response of the random access communications, wherein the random access response is quasi-co-located with the downlink reference signal or one or more reference signals indicated via the downlink control information message.
- The apparatus of claim 5, wherein the instructions to participate in the random access communications are executable by the processor to cause the apparatus to:transmit, to the second network entity and responsive to the random access response, a feedback message of the random access communications in accordance with one or more spatial filters, wherein at least one of the one or more spatial filters is associated with a beam switch pattern of the initial message of the random access communications.
- The apparatus of claim 3, wherein the instructions to participate in the random access communications are executable by the processor to cause the apparatus to:receive a timing advance command or a random access response of the random access communications associated with the second network entity, wherein a downlink control channel used to receive the timing advance command or a downlink control channel used to receive the random access response is quasi-co-located with a downlink control channel used to receive the downlink control information message.
- The apparatus of claim 7, wherein the instructions to participate in the random access communications are executable by the processor to cause the apparatus to:transmit, to the first network entity and responsive to the random access response, a feedback message of the random access communications according to a spatial filter, wherein the spatial filter is associated with a transmission configuration indicator state further associated with the downlink control channel used to receive the downlink control information message, the downlink control channel used to receive the timing advance command, or the downlink control channel used to receive the random access response.
- The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the first set of control messages comprise one or more system information messages, one or more radio resource control messages, one or more medium access control-control element messages, one or more second downlink control information messages, or any combination thereof.
- The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the instructions are further executable by the processor to cause the apparatus to:receive, from the second network entity, a second set of control messages that are indicative of one or more parameters associated with the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure.
- The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the downlink control information message is indicative of an identifier associated with the second network entity, an identifier associated with an uplink bandwidth part further associated with the random access communications, or both.
- The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the first set of control messages are indicative of one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the random access communications, and wherein the downlink control information message is indicative of a coverage enhancement scheme from the one or more coverage enhancement schemes selected for an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure.
- The apparatus of claim 12, wherein the one or more coverage enhancement schemes indicated by the first set of control messages are indicative of a first coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of an initial message of the random access communications in a time domain, a second coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of the initial message in a frequency domain, a third coverage enhancement scheme associated with frequency hopping of the initial message, a fourth coverage enhancement scheme associated with switching a transmission beam associated with the initial message, or any combination thereof.
- The apparatus of claim 13, wherein the first set of control messages are further indicative of a quantity of repetitions associated with the first coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of repetitions associated with the second coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of frequency hops associated with the third coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of beam switches associated with the fourth coverage enhancement scheme, an index associated with a pattern further associated with a coverage enhancement scheme of the one or more coverage enhancement schemes, oy any combination thereof.
- The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the downlink control information message is indicative of an activation of a set of uplink data resources or uplink control resources for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity or is indicative of whether the UE may retransmit an initial message of the random access communications prior to expiration of a timer, wherein a control message of the first set of control messages comprises an indication of the timer, and wherein the UE initiates the timer based at least in part on receiving a last symbol of the downlink control information message.
- The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the instructions to participate in the random access communications are executable by the processor to cause the apparatus to:transmit an initial message of the random access communications based at least in part on the first set of control messages, wherein a first duration between reception of a last symbol of the downlink control information message and transmission of a first symbol of the initial message satisfies one or more thresholds.
- The apparatus of claim 16, wherein the instructions to participate in the random access communications are executable by the processor to cause the apparatus to:transmit a retransmission of the initial message of the random access communications based at least in part on transmitting the initial message, wherein a second duration between reception of the last symbol of the downlink control information message and transmission of a first symbol of the retransmission satisfies the one or more thresholds.
- The apparatus of claim 16, wherein the first duration exceeds a first threshold of the one or more thresholds and fails to exceed a second threshold of the one or more thresholds.
- The apparatus of claim 18, wherein the first threshold is based at least in part on a capability of the UE, a coverage enhancement scheme indicated to the UE, a duration associated with switching a bandwidth part, a carrier frequency, a frequency range and a subcarrier spacing between the first network entity and the second network entity, a processing delay, a cell re-selection delay, a transmit chain switching mode of the UE, or any combination thereof.
- The apparatus of claim 18, wherein the second threshold is based at least in part on a validity period associated with the downlink control information message.
- An apparatus for wireless communications at a first network entity, comprising:a processor;memory coupled with the processor; andinstructions stored in the memory and executable by the processor to cause the apparatus to:receive, from a user equipment (UE) , a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure, wherein the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a random access message to a second network entity;transmit, responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure; andtransmit the downlink control information message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
- The apparatus of claim 21, wherein the instructions are further executable by the processor to cause the apparatus to:transmit, to the second network entity, a second request for the second network entity to perform the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure with the UE based at least in part on receiving the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the first request from the UE; andreceive, responsive to the second request, an acknowledgment message indicative of the set of uplink resources and the set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure.
- The apparatus of claim 21, wherein the set of uplink resources comprises at least one uplink bandwidth part associated with the second network entity and one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure, and wherein the set of downlink resources comprises at least one downlink bandwidth part associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part and one or more downlink reference signals associated with the one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure.
- The apparatus of claim 23, wherein the first set of control messages are further indicative of parameters associated with one or more uplink channels associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part, one or more reference numerologies, one or more preamble formats, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part, one or more repetition patterns associated with an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure, one or more frequency hopping patterns associated with the initial message, one or more beam switch patterns associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of repetitions of the initial message, a threshold quantity of frequency hops associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of beam switches associated with the initial message, a set of uplink data resource or uplink control resources associated with the second network entity for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity, one or more downlink channels associated with the at least one downlink bandwidth part, one or more control resource sets, one or more search space sets, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one downlink bandwidth part, or any combination thereof.
- The apparatus of claim 23, wherein the at least one downlink bandwidth part is associated with the first network entity, and the instructions are further executable by the processor to cause the apparatus to:transmit a timing advance command or a random access response of the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure associated with the second network entity, wherein a downlink control channel used to receive the timing advance command or a downlink control channel used to receive the random access response is quasi-co-located with a downlink control channel used to receive the downlink control information message.
- The apparatus of claim 25, wherein the instructions are further executable by the processor to cause the apparatus to:receive, responsive to the random access response, a feedback message of the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure according to a spatial filter, wherein the spatial filter is associated with a transmission configuration indicator state further associated with the downlink control channel used to receive the downlink control information message, the downlink control channel used to receive the timing advance command, or the downlink control channel used to receive the random access response.
- The apparatus of claim 21, wherein the first set of control messages comprise one or more system information messages, one or more radio resource control messages, one or more medium access control-control element messages, one or more second downlink control information messages, or any combination thereof.
- The apparatus of claim 21, wherein the downlink control information message is indicative of an identifier associated with the second network entity, an identifier associated with an uplink bandwidth part further associated with the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure, or both.
- The apparatus of claim 21, wherein the first set of control messages are indicative of one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure, and wherein the downlink control information message is indicative of a coverage enhancement scheme from the one or more coverage enhancement schemes selected for an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure.
- The apparatus of claim 29, wherein the one or more coverage enhancement schemes indicated by the first set of control messages are indicative of a first coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure in a time domain, a second coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of the initial message in a frequency domain, a third coverage enhancement scheme associated with frequency hopping of the initial message, a fourth coverage enhancement scheme associated with switching a transmission beam associated with the initial message, or any combination thereof.
- The apparatus of claim 30, wherein the first set of control messages are further indicative of a quantity of repetitions associated with the first coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of repetitions associated with the second coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of frequency hops associated with the third coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of beam switches associated with the fourth coverage enhancement scheme, an index associated with a pattern further associated with a coverage enhancement scheme of the one or more coverage enhancement schemes, oy any combination thereof.
- The apparatus of claim 21, wherein the downlink control information message is indicative of an activation of a set of uplink data resources or uplink control resources for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity or is indicative of whether the UE may retransmit an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure prior to expiration of a timer, wherein a control message of the first set of control messages comprises an indication of the timer, and wherein initiation of the timer is based at least in part on the UE receiving a last symbol of the downlink control information message.
- The apparatus of claim 21, wherein the instructions are further executable by the processor to cause the apparatus to:receive an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure based at least in part on the first set of control messages, wherein a first duration between reception of a last symbol of the downlink control information message and transmission of a first symbol of the initial message satisfies one or more thresholds.
- The apparatus of claim 33, wherein the first duration exceeds a first threshold of the one or more thresholds and fails to exceed a second threshold of the one or more thresholds.
- The apparatus of claim 34, wherein the first threshold is based at least in part on a capability of the UE, a coverage enhancement scheme indicated to the UE, a duration associated with switching a bandwidth part, a carrier frequency, a frequency range and a subcarrier spacing between the first network entity and the second network entity, a processing delay, a cell re-selection delay, a transmit chain switching mode of the UE, or any combination thereof.
- The apparatus of claim 34, wherein the second threshold is based at least in part on a validity period associated with the downlink control information message.
- A method for wireless communications at a user equipment (UE) , comprising:transmitting, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure, wherein the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a random access message to a second network entity;receiving, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure;receiving, from the first network entity, the downlink control information message; andparticipating in random access communications with the second network entity, responsive to the downlink control information message, wherein at least a portion of the random access communications are based at least in part on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
- The method of claim 37, further comprising:obtaining a timing advance associated with the second network entity based at least in part on performing a portion of the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages, wherein the set of uplink resources, the set of downlink resources, or both, are associated with the first network entity, the second network entity, or both.
- The method of claim 37, wherein the set of uplink resources comprises at least one uplink bandwidth part associated with the second network entity and one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure, and wherein the set of downlink resources comprises at least one downlink bandwidth part associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part and one or more downlink reference signals associated with the one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure.
- The method of claim 39, wherein the first set of control messages are further indicative of parameters associated with one or more uplink channels associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part, one or more reference numerologies, one or more preamble formats, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part, one or more repetition patterns associated with an initial message of the random access communications, one or more frequency hopping patterns associated with the initial message, one or more beam switch patterns associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of repetitions of the initial message, a threshold quantity of frequency hops associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of beam switches associated with the initial message, a set of uplink data resource or uplink control resources associated with the second network entity for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity, one or more downlink channels associated with the at least one downlink bandwidth part, one or more control resource sets, one or more search space sets, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one downlink bandwidth part, or any combination thereof.
- The method of claim 39, wherein the at least one downlink bandwidth part is associated with the second network entity, and wherein participating in the random access communications comprises:receiving a downlink reference signal associated with an initial message of the random access communications and a random access response of the random access communications, wherein the random access response is quasi-co-located with the downlink reference signal or one or more reference signals indicated via the downlink control information message.
- The method of claim 41, wherein participating in the random access communications comprises:transmitting, to the second network entity and responsive to the random access response, a feedback message of the random access communications in accordance with one or more spatial filters, wherein at least one of the one or more spatial filters is associated with a beam switch pattern of the initial message of the random access communications.
- The method of claim 39, wherein the at least one downlink bandwidth part is associated with the first network entity, and wherein participating in the random access communications comprises:receiving a timing advance command or a random access response of the random access communications associated with the second network entity, wherein a downlink control channel used to receive the timing advance command or a downlink control channel used to receive the random access response is quasi-co-located with a downlink control channel used to receive the downlink control information message.
- The method of claim 43, wherein participating in the random access communications comprises:transmitting, to the first network entity and responsive to the random access response, a feedback message of the random access communications according to a spatial filter, wherein the spatial filter is associated with a transmission configuration indicator state further associated with the downlink control channel used to receive the downlink control information message, the downlink control channel used to receive the timing advance command, or the downlink control channel used to receive the random access response.
- The method of claim 37, wherein the first set of control messages comprise one or more system information messages, one or more radio resource control messages, one or more medium access control-control element messages, one or more second downlink control information messages, or any combination thereof.
- The method of claim 37, further comprising:receiving, from the second network entity, a second set of control messages that are indicative of one or more parameters associated with the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure.
- The method of claim 37, wherein the downlink control information message is indicative of an identifier associated with the second network entity, an identifier associated with an uplink bandwidth part further associated with the random access communications, or both.
- The method of claim 37, wherein the first set of control messages are indicative of one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the random access communications, and wherein the downlink control information message is indicative of a coverage enhancement scheme from the one or more coverage enhancement schemes selected for an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure.
- The method of claim 48, wherein the one or more coverage enhancement schemes indicated by the first set of control messages are indicative of a first coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of an initial message of the random access communications in a time domain, a second coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of the initial message in a frequency domain, a third coverage enhancement scheme associated with frequency hopping of the initial message, a fourth coverage enhancement scheme associated with switching a transmission beam associated with the initial message, or any combination thereof.
- The method of claim 49, wherein the first set of control messages are further indicative of a quantity of repetitions associated with the first coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of repetitions associated with the second coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of frequency hops associated with the third coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of beam switches associated with the fourth coverage enhancement scheme, an index associated with a pattern further associated with a coverage enhancement scheme of the one or more coverage enhancement schemes, oy any combination thereof.
- The method of claim 37, wherein the downlink control information message is indicative of an activation of a set of uplink data resources or uplink control resources for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity or is indicative of whether the UE may retransmit an initial message of the random access communications prior to expiration of a timer, wherein a control message of the first set of control messages comprises an indication of the timer, and wherein the UE initiates the timer based at least in part on receiving a last symbol of the downlink control information message.
- The method of claim 37, wherein participating in the random access communications comprises:transmitting an initial message of the random access communications based at least in part on the first set of control messages, wherein a first duration between reception of a last symbol of the downlink control information message and transmission of a first symbol of the initial message satisfies one or more thresholds.
- The method of claim 52, wherein participating in the random access communications comprises:transmitting a retransmission of the initial message of the random access communications based at least in part on transmitting the initial message, wherein a second duration between reception of the last symbol of the downlink control information message and transmission of a first symbol of the retransmission satisfies the one or more thresholds.
- The method of claim 52, wherein the first duration exceeds a first threshold of the one or more thresholds and fails to exceed a second threshold of the one or more thresholds.
- The method of claim 54, wherein the first threshold is based at least in part on a capability of the UE, a coverage enhancement scheme indicated to the UE, a duration associated with switching a bandwidth part, a carrier frequency, a frequency range and a subcarrier spacing between the first network entity and the second network entity, a processing delay, a cell re-selection delay, a transmit chain switching mode of the UE, or any combination thereof.
- The method of claim 54, wherein the second threshold is based at least in part on a validity period associated with the downlink control information message.
- A method for wireless communications at a first network entity, comprising:receiving, from a user equipment (UE) , a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure, wherein the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a random access message to a second network entity;transmitting, responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure; andtransmitting the downlink control information message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
- The method of claim 57, further comprising:transmitting, to the second network entity, a second request for the second network entity to perform the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure with the UE based at least in part on receiving the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the first request from the UE; andreceiving, responsive to the second request, an acknowledgment message indicative of the set of uplink resources and the set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure.
- The method of claim 57, wherein the set of uplink resources comprises at least one uplink bandwidth part associated with the second network entity and one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure, and wherein the set of downlink resources comprises at least one downlink bandwidth part associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part and one or more downlink reference signals associated with the one or more first resources configured for the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure.
- The method of claim 59, wherein the first set of control messages are further indicative of parameters associated with one or more uplink channels associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part, one or more reference numerologies, one or more preamble formats, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one uplink bandwidth part, one or more repetition patterns associated with an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure, one or more frequency hopping patterns associated with the initial message, one or more beam switch patterns associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of repetitions of the initial message, a threshold quantity of frequency hops associated with the initial message, a threshold quantity of beam switches associated with the initial message, a set of uplink data resource or uplink control resources associated with the second network entity for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity, one or more downlink channels associated with the at least one downlink bandwidth part, one or more control resource sets, one or more search space sets, one or more reference signals, or any combination thereof, associated with the at least one downlink bandwidth part, or any combination thereof.
- The method of claim 59, wherein the at least one downlink bandwidth part is associated with the first network entity, the method further comprising:transmitting a timing advance command or a random access response of the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure associated with the second network entity, wherein a downlink control channel used to receive the timing advance command or a downlink control channel used to receive the random access response is quasi-co-located with a downlink control channel used to receive the downlink control information message.
- The method of claim 61, further comprising:receiving, responsive to the random access response, a feedback message of the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure according to a spatial filter, wherein the spatial filter is associated with a transmission configuration indicator state further associated with the downlink control channel used to receive the downlink control information message, the downlink control channel used to receive the timing advance command, or the downlink control channel used to receive the random access response.
- The method of claim 57, wherein the first set of control messages comprise one or more system information messages, one or more radio resource control messages, one or more medium access control-control element messages, one or more second downlink control information messages, or any combination thereof.
- The method of claim 57, wherein the downlink control information message is indicative of an identifier associated with the second network entity, an identifier associated with an uplink bandwidth part further associated with the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure, or both.
- The method of claim 57, wherein the first set of control messages are indicative of one or more coverage enhancement schemes associated with the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure, and wherein the downlink control information message is indicative of a coverage enhancement scheme from the one or more coverage enhancement schemes selected for an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure.
- The method of claim 65, wherein the one or more coverage enhancement schemes indicated by the first set of control messages are indicative of a first coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure in a time domain, a second coverage enhancement scheme associated with repeating transmission of the initial message in a frequency domain, a third coverage enhancement scheme associated with frequency hopping of the initial message, a fourth coverage enhancement scheme associated with switching a transmission beam associated with the initial message, or any combination thereof.
- The method of claim 66, wherein the first set of control messages are further indicative of a quantity of repetitions associated with the first coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of repetitions associated with the second coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of frequency hops associated with the third coverage enhancement scheme, a quantity of beam switches associated with the fourth coverage enhancement scheme, an index associated with a pattern further associated with a coverage enhancement scheme of the one or more coverage enhancement schemes, oy any combination thereof.
- The method of claim 57, wherein the downlink control information message is indicative of an activation of a set of uplink data resources or uplink control resources for transmission of a first uplink message after switching from the first network entity to the second network entity or is indicative of whether the UE may retransmit an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure prior to expiration of a timer, wherein a control message of the first set of control messages comprises an indication of the timer, and wherein initiation of the timer is based at least in part on the UE receiving a last symbol of the downlink control information message.
- The method of claim 57, further comprising:receiving an initial message of the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure based at least in part on the first set of control messages, wherein a first duration between reception of a last symbol of the downlink control information message and transmission of a first symbol of the initial message satisfies one or more thresholds.
- The method of claim 69, wherein the first duration exceeds a first threshold of the one or more thresholds and fails to exceed a second threshold of the one or more thresholds.
- The method of claim 70, wherein the first threshold is based at least in part on a capability of the UE, a coverage enhancement scheme indicated to the UE, a duration associated with switching a bandwidth part, a carrier frequency, a frequency range and a subcarrier spacing between the first network entity and the second network entity, a processing delay, a cell re-selection delay, a transmit chain switching mode of the UE, or any combination thereof.
- The method of claim 70, wherein the second threshold is based at least in part on a validity period associated with the downlink control information message.
- An apparatus for wireless communications at a user equipment (UE) , comprising:means for transmitting, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure, wherein the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a random access message to a second network entity;means for receiving, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure;means for receiving, from the first network entity, the downlink control information message; andmeans for participating in random access communications with the second network entity, responsive to the downlink control information message, wherein at least a portion of the random access communications are based at least in part on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
- An apparatus for wireless communications at a first network entity, comprising:means for receiving, from a user equipment (UE) , a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure, wherein the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a random access message to a second network entity;means for transmitting, responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure; andmeans for transmitting the downlink control information message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
- A non-transitory computer-readable medium storing code for wireless communications at a user equipment (UE) , the code comprising instructions executable by a processor to:transmit, to a first network entity, a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a request for a downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure, wherein the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a random access message to a second network entity;receive, from the first network entity and responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure;receive, from the first network entity, the downlink control information message; andparticipate in random access communications with the second network entity, responsive to the downlink control information message, wherein at least a portion of the random access communications are based at least in part on the set of uplink resources or the set of downlink resources indicated by the first set of control messages.
- A non-transitory computer-readable medium storing code for wireless communications at a first network entity, the code comprising instructions executable by a processor to:receive, from a user equipment (UE) , a measurement report, UE assistance information, or a first request for a downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure, wherein the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure includes a downlink control information message from the first network entity ordering the UE to transmit a random access message to a second network entity;transmit, responsive to the measurement report, the UE assistance information, or the first request, a first set of control messages that are indicative of a set of uplink resources and a set of downlink resources for use in the downlink control channel-ordered random access procedure; andtransmit the downlink control information message in accordance with the first request and the first set of control messages.
Priority Applications (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2023/085550 WO2024197835A1 (en) | 2023-03-31 | 2023-03-31 | Enhancements for random access procedures |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2023/085550 WO2024197835A1 (en) | 2023-03-31 | 2023-03-31 | Enhancements for random access procedures |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2024197835A1 true WO2024197835A1 (en) | 2024-10-03 |
Family
ID=92903112
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2023/085550 Pending WO2024197835A1 (en) | 2023-03-31 | 2023-03-31 | Enhancements for random access procedures |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| WO (1) | WO2024197835A1 (en) |
Citations (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20210307081A1 (en) * | 2017-05-11 | 2021-09-30 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method and apparatus for establishing connection between terminal and base station |
-
2023
- 2023-03-31 WO PCT/CN2023/085550 patent/WO2024197835A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20210307081A1 (en) * | 2017-05-11 | 2021-09-30 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method and apparatus for establishing connection between terminal and base station |
Non-Patent Citations (4)
| Title |
|---|
| JUHA KORHONEN, MEDIATEK INC.: "38.300 running CR for introduction of NR further mobility enhancements", 3GPP DRAFT; R2-2213332; TYPE DRAFTCR; NR_MOB_ENH2-CORE, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), vol. RAN WG2, no. Toulouse, FR; 20221114 - 20221118, 17 November 2022 (2022-11-17), FR, XP052228592 * |
| PATRICK MERIAS, MODERATOR (CATT): "Moderator summary on Timing advance management for LTM: Round 4", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2302165; TYPE DISCUSSION; NR_MOB_ENH2-CORE, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), vol. RAN WG1, no. Athens, GR; 20230227 - 20230303, 3 March 2023 (2023-03-03), FR, XP052251856 * |
| WEIWEI WANG, SAMSUNG: "Discussion on potential enhancement before LTM cell switch", 3GPP DRAFT; R2-2301325; TYPE DISCUSSION; NR_MOB_ENH2-CORE, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), vol. RAN WG2, no. Athens, GR; 20230227 - 20230303, 17 February 2023 (2023-02-17), FR, XP052245962 * |
| YI GUO, INTEL CORPORATION: "Procedure descriptions of LTM", 3GPP DRAFT; R2-2300400; TYPE DISCUSSION; NR_MOB_ENH2-CORE, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), vol. RAN WG2, no. Athens, GR; 20230227 - 20230303, 17 February 2023 (2023-02-17), FR, XP052245047 * |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US11438813B2 (en) | Enhanced user equipment capability exchange during handover | |
| WO2021068161A1 (en) | Indication of synchronization signal and physical broadcasting channel block transmission beam adjustment | |
| US12200549B2 (en) | Techniques for handover in non-terrestrial networks | |
| WO2020252684A1 (en) | New radio synchronization signal block related idle measurement configuration | |
| US11671867B2 (en) | Listen before talk type dependent channel measurements for sidelink communications | |
| US11956717B2 (en) | Techniques for selecting an uplink control information reporting mode | |
| US20250267729A1 (en) | Criteria for prach repetition | |
| US20230354073A1 (en) | Cross-link interference reporting on physical uplink channels | |
| US20230403586A1 (en) | Techniques for performing non-terrestrial cell measurements | |
| WO2021026802A1 (en) | Timing advance adjustment for downlink carrier aggregation | |
| WO2021223204A1 (en) | Vehicle-to-everything cell reselection | |
| US12382399B2 (en) | Radio link monitoring and beam failure detection for energy saving modes | |
| US20240015680A1 (en) | User equipment assisted uplink synchronization for inter-cell mobility | |
| WO2024197835A1 (en) | Enhancements for random access procedures | |
| WO2021088713A1 (en) | Signaling in asynchronous carrier aggregation | |
| WO2021046836A1 (en) | Internode measurement configuration signaling | |
| WO2025024953A1 (en) | Signaling for lower layer triggered mobility handovers | |
| WO2024168813A1 (en) | Timing advanced measurement for candidate cells | |
| WO2024212084A1 (en) | A framework for supplementary uplink and uplink carrier aggregation | |
| WO2024108455A1 (en) | Reference signal indication for a candidate cell in l1/l2 mobility | |
| WO2024152350A1 (en) | Random access channel configurations for candidate cell switching | |
| WO2024187394A1 (en) | Techniques for managing adjacent channel coexistence for different radio access technologies | |
| WO2025160882A1 (en) | Cell switching for measurement gap activation | |
| US20240244498A1 (en) | Autonomous radio link failure during random access procedure | |
| WO2024026762A1 (en) | Uplink transmit switching for sidelink and uplink bands |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 23929420 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
| NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |